M 569 Content

PDHonline Course M569 (10 PDH)
_______________________________________________________________________________
ASME Section II/A - Ferrous Materials

Guide for Inspections & Tests
Instructor: Jurandir Primo, PE
2015
PDH Online | PDH Center
5272 Meadow Estates Drive

Fairfax, VA 22030-6658
Phone & Fax: 703-988-0088
www.PDHonline.org
www.PDHcenter.com
An Approved Continuing Education Provider

www.PDHcenter.com PDHonline Course M569 www.PDHonline.org
ASME SECTION II/A FERROUS MATERIALS

GUIDE FOR INSPECTION & TESTS
CONTENTS:
I. INTRODUCTION
II. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
III. ASME SECTION II, PART A FERROUS MATERIALS
1) SA-6/SA-6M - General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling:
2) SA-20/SA-20M - General Requirements of Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels:
3) SA-29/SA-29M Specification for Steel Bras, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought:
4) SA-31 Specification for Steel Rivets and Bars for Rivets, Pressure Vessels:
5) SA-36/SA-36M Specification for Carbon Structural Steel:
6) SA-47/SA-47M Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings:
7) SA-53/SA-53M Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless:
8) SA-105/SA-105M Specification of Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications:
9) SA-106/SA-106M Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service:
10) SA-134 Specif. for Pipe, Steel, Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded (NPS 16 and Over):
11) SA-135 Specification for Electric-Resistance Welded Steel Pipe:
12) SA-178/SA-178M Specification for Electric-Resistance Welded Carbon Steel and Carbon-Manganese Steel
Boiler and Superheater Tubes:
13) SA-179/SA-179M Specification for Seamless Cold-Drawn, Low-Carbon Steel, Heat Exchanger and Conden-
ser Tubes:
14) SA-181/SA-181M Specif. for Carbon Steel Forgings, for General-Purpose Piping:
15) SA-182/SA-182M Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings,
Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service:
16) SA-192/SA-192M Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Boiler Tubes for High-Pressure Service:
17) SA-193/SA-193M Specif. for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature or High-
Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications:
18) SA-194/SA-194M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts of Bolts for High-Pressure or High-
Temperature Service, or Both:
19) SA-202/SA-202M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Manganese-Silicon:
20) SA-203/SA-203M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Nickel:
21) SA-204/SA-204M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Molybdenum:
22) SA-209/SA-209M Spec. for Seamless Carbon-Molybdenum Alloy-Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes:
23) SA-210/SA-210M Specification for Seamless Medium-Carbon Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes:
24) SA-213/SA-213M Specification for Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic Alloy-Steel Boiler, Superheater, and
Heat-Exchanger Tubes:
25) SA-214/SA-214M Specification for Electric-Resistance Welded Carbon Steel, Heat-Exchanger and Conden-
ser Tubes:
26) SA-216/SA-216M Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding for High-
Temperature Service:
27) SA-217/SA-217M Specification for Steel Castings, Martensitic Stainless and Alloy, for Pressure Containing
Parts, Suitable for High-Temperature Service:
28) SA-225/SA-225M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Vanadium-Nickel:
29) SA-231/SA-231M Specification for Chromium-Vanadium Alloy Steel Spring Wire:
30) SA-232/SA-232M Specification for Chromium-Vanadium Alloy Steel Valve Spring Quality Wire:
31) SA-234/SA-234M Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
High-Temperature Service:
32) SA-240/SA-240M Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip
for Pressure Vessels for General Applications:
33) SA-249/SA-249M Specification for Welded Austenitic Steel Boiler, Superheater, Heat-Exchanger, and Con-
denser Tubes:
34) SA-250/SA-250M Spec. for Electric-Resistance Welded Ferritic Alloy-Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes:
35) SA-263 Specification for Stainless Chromium Steel-Clad Plate:
36) SA-264 Specification for Stainless Chromium-Nickel for Steel-Clad Plate:
2015 Jurandir Primo Page 1 of 136

37) SA-265 Specification for Nickel and Nickel-Base Alloy-Clad Steel Plate:
38) SA-266/SA-266M Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Pressure Vessel Components:
39) SA-268/SA-268M Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic and Martensitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service:
40) SA-275/SA-275M Test Method for Magnetic Particle Examination of Steel Forgings:
41) SA-276 Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes:
42) SA-278/SA-278M Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Pressure-Containing Parts for Temperatures up to
650 F (350 C):
43) SA-283/SA-283M Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates:
44) SA-285/SA-285M Spec. for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength:
45) SA-299/SA-299M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Silicon:
46) SA-302/SA-302M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Molybdenum and Man-
ganese-Molybdenum-Nickel:
47) SA-307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 psi Tensile Strength:
48) SA-311/SA-311M Specification for Cold-Drawn, Stress-Relieved Carbon Steel Bars, Subject to Mechanical
Property Requirements:
49) SA-312/SA-312M Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes:
50) SA-320/SA-320M Spec. for Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for Low Temperature Service:
51) SA-325 Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat-Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength:
52) SA-333/333M Specification for Seamless and Welded Steel Pipe for Low-Tem-perature Service:
53) SA-334/334M Spec. for Seamless and Welded Carbon and Alloy-Steel Tubes for Low-Temperature Service:
54) SA-335/335M Specification for Seamless Ferritic Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Tempe-rature Service:
55) SA-336/336M Specification for Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure and High-Tem-perature Parts:
56) SA-350/350M Specification for Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel Forgings, Requiring Notch Toughness Testing
for Piping Components:
57) SA-351/351M Spec. for Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure Containing Parts:
58) SA-352/352M Specification for Steel Castings, Ferritic and Martensitic, for Pressure Containing Parts, Suit-
able for Low-Temperature Service:
59) SA-353/353M Spec. for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, 9% Nickel, Double Normalized and Tempered:
60) SA-354 Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded
Fasteners:
61) SA-358/SA-358M Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Alloy Steel Pipe for
High Temperature Service:
62) SA-369/SA-369M Specification for Carbon and Ferritic Alloy Steel Forged and Bored Pipe for High Tempera-
ture Service:
63) SA-370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products:
64) SA-372/SA-372M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings for Thin-Walled Pressure Vessels:
65) SA-376/SA-376M Specification for Seamless Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Tem-perature Central-Station
Service:
66) SA-387/SA-387M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum:
67) SA-388/SA-388M Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Heavy Steel Forgings:
68) SA-395/SA-395M Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated
Temperatures:
69) SA-403/SA-403M Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings:
70) SA-409/SA-409M Specification for Welded Large Diameter Austenitic Steel Pipe for Corrosive or High-
71) SA-414/SA-414M Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, for Pressure Vessels:
72) SA-420/SA-420M Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Low-
73) SA-423/SA-423M Specification for Seamless and Electric-Welded Low-Alloy Steel Tubes:
74) SA-426/SA-426M Specification for Centrifugally Cast Ferritic Alloy Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service:
75) SA-435/SA-435M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates:
76) SA-437/SA-437M Specification for Alloy Steel Turbine-Type Bolting Material Specially Heat-Treated for
77) SA-449 Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat-Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum
Tensile Strength, General Use:
78) SA-450/SA-450M Specification for General Requirements for Carbon, Ferritic Alloy, and Austenitic Alloy
Steel Tubes:

I. THE ASME CODE SECTIONS:
The ASME Code is a forest of mandatory requirements, non-mandatory guidelines, specific prohibi-
tions, construction activities, defined materials, calculations and technical formulas. Every day a
student or a professional is looking for a short and timely handbook with practical information and
concepts, the way he can conclude a work without wasting too much his precious time.
Even difficult, the main objective of this PDH study is to make a practical summary of the ferrous
materials according to ASME Section II Part A in a didactic way, showing the main definitions
of manufacturing, quality, inspection and tests, since the simple reading of the books is very difficult
to interpret and understand, even for any experienced professional, as it is known that is extremely
rare, a process professional to know all design subjects of the complete ASME codes.
SECTION II. Materials: The Section II, Materials, is the second section of the ASME Code, which
contains 4 books that efficiently organize the important materials data used in ASME code design
and construction for boilers and pressure vessels. It covers every aspect of boilers and pressure
vessels from design to fabrication, including use of materials, welding, and nondestructive testing.
The specifications for materials given in Section II are identical with or similar to those of specifica-
tions published by ASTM, AWS, and other recognized national or international organizations.
The ASME Code, Section II - Materials, contains four parts that efficiently organize the important
materials data used for code design and construction of boilers and pressure vessels. The proper-
ties for the electronic Stress Tables in Part D are given in Customary and Metric units of measure-
ment, which can be very much interactive, and all of the content is full-text searchable. The classifi-
cation of Section II, Materials is described below:
Part A - Ferrous Material Specifications: Provides material specifications for ferrous mate-
rials which are suitable for use in the construction of pressure vessels. The specifications
contained in this Part define the mechanical properties, heat treatment, chemical composi-
tion and analysis, test specimens, and methodologies of testing.
Part B - Nonferrous Material Specifications: Provides material specifications for nonfer-
rous materials which are suitable for use in the construction of pressure vessels. The specifi-
cations contained in this Part define the mechanical properties, heat treatment, chemical
composition and analysis, test specimens, and methodologies of testing.
Part C - Specifications for Welding Rods, Electrodes, and Filler Metals: Provides me-
chanical properties, heat treatment, chemical composition, and methodologies of testing for
welding rods, filler metals and electrodes used in the construction of pressure vessels. The
definitions contained in this Part are designated with SFA and a number that is taken from
the American Welding Society (AWS) specifications (example, SFA-5.1 Mild Steel Arc Weld-
ing Electrodes E-6010).
Part D Properties (Customary/Metric): Divided into three subparts - 1 Stress Tables; 2
Physical Properties Tables; 3 Charts and Tables for determining shell thickness of compo-
nents under external pressure and which provides tables for the design stress values, tensile
and yield stress values as well as tables for material properties, such as modulus of elastici-
ty, coefficient of heat transfer, etc.

The next PDH study will follow as Part B and Part C. As Part D is only Charts and Tables with de-
sign values it will not follow as a PDH study. Then, this Section shows a very good opportunity to
know the main metallurgical ferrous materials topics, such as steel plates, steel castings, pipes,
tubes and fasteners in a summarized way. The complete ASME Code Sections are:
I. Power Boilers;
II. Materials;
III. Rules for Construction of Nuclear Facility Components;
IV. Heating Boilers;
V. Nondestructive Examination;
VI. Recommended Rules for the Care and Operation of Heating Boilers;
VII. Recommended Guidelines for the Care of Power Boilers;
VIII. Pressure Vessels;
IX. Welding and Brazing Qualifications;
X. Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels;
XI. Rules for In-service Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components;
XII. Rules for Construction and Continued Service of Transport Tanks.
II. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS:
Materials: The materials to be used for vessels must be selected from approved material specifica-
tions. The main factors that need to be considered for a suitable manufacturing material for pressure
vessels are, cost, fabricability, service condition (wear, corrosion, operating temperatures) and
strength requirements. The user or student should be very well versed in imperial and metric pres-
sure conversions and know the meaning of all metallurgical terms used in this Section. Thus, for
refreshing, some main references are here described.
Properties: The properties of structural steels result from both chemical and mechanical properties,
including processing during fabrication. The ferrous materials are defined by standards limits of the
material compositions, quality and destructive tests, commonly used for fabrication. The properties
that need to be considered when specifying steel construction materials are described below.
Design Loads: Are forces that influence the vessels design. These loads are internal/external pres-
sure; dead loads due to the weight of the vessel and contents; external loads from piping and at-
tachments, wind, and earthquakes; operating-type loads such as vibration; and startup and shut-
down loads. The Code considers design pressure, temperature, and, to some extent, the influence
of other loads that impact the circumferential and longitudinal stresses in shells. It is left to the de-
signer to account for the effect of other loads, as local building codes and earthquake loadings.
ASME Certification and Inspection Procedures: The symbols "A", "S", "U", "PP" and "H"
Stamps covers the fabrication and alteration of high pressure boilers, unfired pressure vessels, po-
wer piping and heating boilers. Once any ASME Stamped Pressure Vessel is manufactured, it is
checked, tested and approved by the ASME Authorized Inspector, who review procedures, docu-
mentation and sign the Data Report Form before stamp the name plate with the U or UM sym-
bols, which means that the Pressure Vessel fully complies with the ASME Code rules.

The National Board of Boiler & Pressure Vessel Inspectors uses the NB symbol as well the R
symbol to repair or to alter any previous Stamped Pressure Vessel. All material used in manufacture
must be documented. All welders must be certified. Manufacturers have a Welding Authorized In-
spector, who is the judge of code acceptability. The quality of weld is then checked for lack, pene-
tration, slag inclusion, overlap and excessive reinforcement. At the final inspection the units are hy-
drostatically tested and observed for leaks.
Weldability: Refers to the ability of a material to be welded, as all structural steels are essentially
weldable. However, welding involves locally melting of the steel, which subsequently cools. The
cooling can be quite fast because the induced heat is usually relatively small. This can lead to hard-
ening of the steel part (heat affected zone or HAZ) and to reduced toughness.
Welding Efficiency: When the vessel design is required as non-radiographed, the longitudinal
butt-welded joints must indicate a joint efficiency factor (E) of 0.7, which corresponds to a safety
factor of 0.5 in., resulting in an increase of 43% in the thickness of the vessel plates. The allowable
stress values to be used in calculation of the vessels wall thickness are given in the ASME Section
II, Part D for many different materials. These stress values are a function of temperature.
Strength: Mechanical strength is the most common property used for most of the rules given in de-
sign codes. The general standards for structural carbon steels (including weathering steel), the pri-
mary designation relates to the yield strength. As an example, the A36 steel is a common carbon
structural steel in the United States and other countries, manufactured in plates, bars, and shapes,
with mechanical properties as shown below:
Mechanical Properties: Mean a qualitative or quantitative procedure that consists of determination

of one or more characteristics of a given product, process or service according to a specified proce-
dure, also designated as physical tests, shown in this example below.
ASTM A36 - ASME SA36:

Tensile strength, psi [MPa].. 58,000 - 80,000 psi (400 - 550 MPa);
Yield point, min, psi [MPa] 36,000 (250 MPa);
Elongation in 8 in. [200 mm], min.. ..20 %;
Elongation in 2 in. [50 mm], min............................................... 23 %.
General Chemical Composition of ASTM A36 - ASME SA36

Grade Thickness C Mn P S Si Cu
0.75 in. 0.25 - 0.04 0.05 0.40 -
0.75t 1 1/2 0.25 0.8-1.20 0.04 0.05 0.40
ASME
1 /12t 2 1/2 0.26 0.8-1.20 0.04 0.05 0.40
SA36
2 1/2 t 4 0.27 0.85-1.20 0.04 0.05 0.40
4 in. 0.29 0.85-1.20 0.04 0.05 0.40

Obs.: Data above is for design temperature up to 650F. Afterward, the minimum strength drops off
for 54,000 psi at 700F; 45,000 psi at 750F; 37,000 psi at 800F. Plates thicker than 8 inches must
be considered to have 32,000 psi (220 MPa) yield strength, and the same ultimate tensile strength.
Chemical Properties: Generally, all metals can be classified into groups, such as ferrous, non-
ferrous and alloys. The ferrous group of metals is composed mainly of iron, and its chemical proper-
ties may have small amounts of other elements such as, carbon, manganese, nickel, chromium, sili-
con, titanium, tungsten etc. Chemical compositions in metals, also give the required properties, such
as, corrosion, abrasion and oxidation resistance, toughness, tensile strength properties, etc.
Allowable Stress: As described before, is used to determine the minimum vessel wall thickness is
based on the material tensile and yield properties at room and design temperature. When the vessel
operates at an elevated temperature, the creep properties of the material must also be considered.
These properties are adjusted by design factors which limit the hoop membrane stress level to a
value that precludes rupture, and excessive elastic or plastic distortion and creep rupture.
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP): Is the maximum allowable working pressure for
a vessel, permissible in its utmost operating condition, at the designated coincident temperature
specified for that pressure. The MAWP should be commonly based on the design codes for the
weakest component of a pressure vessel, pipe or other pressurized items. The Maximum Allowable
Working Pressure (MAWP) is the result of a final calculation, which is the prime factor in setting the
pressure in pressurized equipment, when the vessel Safety Relief Devices should be activated.
Design pressure: Is the designed normal maximum pressure operating condition (or must with-
stand under normal operating conditions) commonly used for calculation of a pressurized tank, pipe,
vessel or boiler item. Design pressure should be also commonly used to calculate the required ves-
sel physical characteristics, such as available materials, fabrication efficiency factors, and employed
alloys, which may result in a vessel that not only meets the required design pressure, but of-
ten exceeds it. In basic terms, the design pressure may be used in all cases in which calculations
are not made to determine the Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP).
Creep: Sometimes called cold flow, is the tendency of a solid material to move slowly or deform
permanently under the influence of a long-term exposure to high levels of stress when subjected
to heat for long periods, which generally increase near the yield point.
Toughness: In materials science and metallurgy, toughness is the ability of a material to absorb
energy and plastically deform without fracturing. If the steel is insufficiently tough, some deformation
in structure can propagate rapidly, and result in a brittle fracture. The risk of brittle fracture in-
creases with thickness, tensile stress, and stress raisers at hotter or colder temperatures. The most
convenient method for toughness testing is the Charpy V-notch impact testing, which measures the
impact energy required to break a small notched specimen, at a specified temperature, through a
single impact blow from a pendulum.
Ductility: Is a measure to which a material can strain or elongate between the onset of yield, and
appears an eventual fracture under loading. The designer relies on ductility for a number of aspects,
using in his design a redistribution of stress at the ultimate limit state, bolt groups, reducing risk of

fatigue crack propagation and relying in the welding fabrication processes, including bending and
straightening. The various standards for steel grades in several tables always show values for ductil-
ity, and if these are specified correctly the designer can be assured of adequate performance.
Durability: Is an important property that is correlated with the corrosion prevention. Although special
corrosion resistant steels are available, these are not normally used in building construction, as the
weathering steel. The most common means of providing corrosion protection to construction steel is
by painting or galvanizing. Type and degree of coating protection required, always depends on the
degree of exposure, location, design life, etc. In many cases, under internal dry situations no corro-
sion protection coatings are required other than appropriate fire protection.

III. ASME SECTION II, PART A FERROUS MATERIALS:
The Section II, Part A, defines the ferrous materials for general application, and follows the same
specifications of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), which has cooperated for
more than fifty years in the preparation of material specifications adequate for safety in the field of
pressure equipment for ferrous and nonferrous materials. Here the Section II, Part A Ferrous Ma-
terial Specification, is described in a summarized form, to be practical and easy to search and find.
Materials produced according to an ASME or ASTM specifications with requirements different from
this Section, defined by other countries, may also be used in accordance with similar ASME specifi-
cations, since the material manufacturer or vessel manufacturer certifies with evidences that the cor-
responding manufacturing specifications have been met. The complete list of ferrous materials of
Section II, Part A, beginning with SA-6 up to SA-450, as described below:
1) SA-6/SA-6M - General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes,
and Sheet Piling: This specification covers a group of common materials, issued by ASTM:
A 36/A - 36M - Carbon Structural Steel;

A 131/A - 131M - Structural Steel for Ships;
A 242/A - 242M - High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel;
A 283/A - 283M - Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates;
A 328/A - 328M - Steel Sheet Piling;
A 514/A - 514M - High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate Suitable for Welding;
A 529/A - 529M - High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality;
A 572/A - 572M - High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steel;
A 573/A - 573M - Structural Carbon Steel Plates of Improved Toughness;
A 588/A - 588M - High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel 50 ksi (345 MPa) Minimum Yield Point to 4 in. [100 mm] thick;
A 633/A - 633M - Normalized High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plates;
A 656/A - 656M - Hot-Rolled Structural Steel, High-Strength Low-Alloy Plate with Improved Formability;
A 678/A - 678M - Quenched-and-Tempered Carbon and High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plates;
A 690/A - 690M - High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel H-Piles and Sheet Piling for Use in Marine Environments;
A 709/A - 709M - Carbon and High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars and Quenched-and-
Tempered Alloy Structural Steel Plates for Bridges;
A 710/A - 710M - Age-Hardening Low-Carbon Nickel-Copper-Chromium-Molybdenum-Columbium Structural Steel Plates;
A 769/A - 769M - Carbon and High-Strength Electric Resistance Welded Steel Structural Shapes;
A 786/A - 786M - Rolled Steel Floor Plates;
A 808/A - 808M - High-Strength Low-Alloy Carbon, Manganese, Columbium, Vanadium Steel of Structural Quality with
Improved Notch Toughness;
A 827/A - 827M - Plates, Carbon Steel, for Forging and Similar Applications;
A 829/A - 829M - Plates, Alloy Steel, Structural Quality;
A 830/A - 830M - Plates, Carbon Steel, Structural Quality, Furnished to Chemical Composition Requirements;
A 852/A - 852M - Quenched and Tempered Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plate with 70 ksi [485 MPa] Minimum Yield Strength
to 4 in. [100 mm] thick;
A 857/A - 857M - Steel Sheet Piling, Cold Formed, Light Gage;
A 871/A - 871M - High-Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel Plate with Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance;
A 913/A - 913M - Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel Shapes of Structural Quality, Produced by Quenching
and Self-Tempering Process QST);
A 945/A - 945M - Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plate with Low Carbon and Restricted Sulfur
for Improved Weldability, Formability, and Toughness;
A 950/A - 950M - Specification for Fusion Bonded Epoxy-Coated Structural Steel H-Piles and Sheet Piling;
A 992/A - 992M - Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing;
A 1043/A - 1043M - Specification for Structural Steel with Low Yield to Tensile Ratio for Use in Buildings;

a) Structural Steel Shapes: The steel products of this section are available in various thickness,
width, and length combinations depending upon processing capabilities of various manufacturers
and processors. If necessary tests are required by a product specification, and not conducted, the
product cannot be qualified to that specification. Slabs, sheet bars, and skelp, frequently falling in
required size ranges, are not classified as plates.
Coils are excluded from this applicable product specification until they are decoiled, leveled or
straightened, formed (if applicable), cut to length, and, if required, properly tested by a processor in
accordance with ASME/ASTM specification requirements. The manufacturing steel shapes covered
in this section are:
Plates: Flats, hot-rolled steel plates, ordered to thickness over 8 in. [200 mm] in width and
0.250 in. [6 mm] or over in thickness. Over 48 in. [1200 mm] in width and 0.180 in. [4.5 mm]
or over in thickness, or weight [mass];
Shapes (Flanged Sections): Structural-size shapes, rolled flanged sections having at least
one dimension of the cross-section 3 in. [75 mm] or greater.
Bar-size Shapes: Rolled flanged sections, max. dimension of cross-section < 3 in. [75 mm].
W Shapes: Doubly-symmetric, wide flange shapes with inside parallel flange surfaces.
HP Shapes: Wide-flange shapes generally used as bearing piles whose flanges and webs
are of the same nominal thickness and whose depth and width are essentially the same.
S Shapes: Doubly-symmetric beam shapes with inside flange surfaces that have a slope
of approximately 1623%.
M Shapes: Doubly-symmetric shapes not classified as W, S, or HP shapes.
C Shapes: Channels with inside flange surfaces, with a slope of approximately 16 2/3%.
MC Shapes: Channels that cannot be classified as C shapes.
L Shapes: Shapes having equal-leg and unequal-leg angles.
Sheet Piling: Rolled steel sections capable of being interlocked, forming a continuous wall
when individual pieces are driven side by side.
Bars: Rounds, flats, and hexagons, of all sizes; flats 13/64 in. and over 3/16 [5 mm] in., but
not over 6 in. [150 mm] in. specified width; flats 0.230 in. and over 1/4 [6 mm] in specified
thickness, over 6 to 8 in. [150 to 200 mm] inclusive, in specified width.
b) Metallurgical Fabrication: To qualify any product to a particular product specification requires all
appropriate and necessary tests be performed and that the results meet the limits prescribed in that
product specification. If the necessary tests required by a product specification cannot be conduct-
ed, the product cannot be qualified to that specification.
Rimmed Steel: Steel containing sufficient oxygen to give a continuous evolution of carbon
monoxide during solidification, resulting in a case or rim of metal virtually free of voids.
Semi-killed Steel: Incompletely deoxidized steel containing sufficient oxygen to form
enough carbon monoxide during solidification to offset solidification shrinkage.
Capped Steel: Rimmed steel in which the rimming action is limited by an early capping op-
eration. Capping is carried out mechanically by using a heavy metal cap on a bottle-top mold
or chemically by an addition of aluminum or ferrosilicon to the top of the molten steel in an
open-top mold.

Killed Steel: Means deoxidized steel, by addition of strong deoxidizing agents, such as sili-
con or aluminum or by vacuum treatment, to reduce the oxygen content that no reaction oc-
curs between carbon and oxygen during solidification.
Mill Edge: Produced by rolling between horizontal finishing rolls. A mill edge does not con-
form to any definite contour. Mill edge plates have two mill edges and two trimmed edges.
Universal Mill Edge: Produced by rolling between horizontal and vertical finishing rolls.
Sometimes designated as UM Plates, these plates have two universal mill edges and two
trimmed edges.
Sheared Edge: Produced by shearing. Sheared edge plates are trimmed on all edges.
Gas Cut Edge: Produced by gas flame cutting.
Special Cut Edge: Produced by gas flame cutting and special practices such as pre-heating
or post-heating, or both in order to minimize stresses, avoid thermal cracking and reduce the
hardness of the gas cut edge. In special instances, is used to designate an edge produced
by machining.
Sketch: When used to describe a form of plate, denotes a plate other than rectangular, cir-
cular, or semi-circular. Sketch plates may be furnished to a radius or with four or more
straight sides.
Plate-as-Rolled: When used in relation to the location and number of tests, the term refers
to the unit plate rolled from a slab or directly from an ingot. It does not refer to the condition
of the plate.
Normalizing: A heat treating process when a steel plate is reheated to a uniform temperatu-
re above the upper critical temperature and then cooled in air, below transformation range.
Fine Grain Practice: A steelmaking practice that is intended to produce killed steel, which is
capable of meeting the requirements for fine austenitic grain size.
c) Chemical Analysis: Sampling for chemical analysis and methods of analysis must be in accord-
ance with Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751. The analyses so determined shall con-
form to the heat analysis requirements for the applicable grade, class, and type of material, subject
to permitted variations. If a range is specified, the requirements of any element in a heat treatment
cannot vary above and below the specified range. Rimmed or capped steel is characterized by a
lack of homogeneity in its composition, especially by carbon, phosphorus, and sulfur.
d) Metallurgical Structure: When the austenitic grain size testing is required, such testing shall be
in accordance with Test Methods E 112, and at least 70% of the grains in the area examined must
meet the specified grain size requirement.
Coarse Austenitic Grain Size: When coarse austenitic grain size is specified, the deter-
mined austenitic grain size number must be in the range of 1 to 5, inclusive, as determined
by the McQuaid-Ehn Test.
Fine Austenitic Grain Size: When fine austenitic grain size is specified, the determined
austenitic grain size number must be 5 or higher. A total aluminum content of 0.020% or
more, and acid soluble aluminum content of 0.015% or more.
e) Heat Treatment: When no heat treatment is required, the manufacturer or processor has the op-
tion of heat treating the structural product by normalizing, stress relieving, or normalizing and then,
of stress relieving to meet the applicable product specification.

f) Welding Requirements: Welding must be in accordance with a welding procedure specification

(WPS) using Shielded Metal Arc Welding SMAW), Gas Metal Arc W elding (GMAW), Flux-Cored Arc
Welding (FCAW), or Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) processes. Shielding gases used shall be of
welding quality. Electrodes and electrode-flux combinations shall be in accordance with the re-
quirements of AWS Specification A5.1, 5.5, A5.17, A5.18, A5.20, A5.23, A5.28, or A5.29, whichever
is applicable. For SMAW, low hydrogen electrodes shall be used.
Electrodes and electrode-flux combinations shall be selected so that, the tensile strength of the de-
posited weld metal (after a required heat treatment) is consistent with the tensile strength specified
for the base metal being repaired. The welding electrodes and flux materials shall be dry and pro-
tected from moisture during storage and use. Prior to repair welding, the surface to be welded shall
be inspected to avoid surface imperfections.
Welders and welding operators shall be qualified in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWS
D1.1 or ASME Section IX, except when a groove weld qualification, may qualify the welder to per-
form the welding. Repairs must be in accordance with a welding procedure specification (WPS), ac-
cording to the requirements of the ANSI/AWS D1.1 or ASME Section IX. The WPS may include a
welding qualification by Charpy V-notch testing, when specified in the purchase order, meeting the
test conditions, and the acceptance criteria is clearly specified.
g) Inspection and Tests: All tests must be conducted in accordance with Test Methods and Defini-
tions A 370. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free entry, at all times, to all parts
of the manufacturers works that concern the manufacture of the structural product ordered. The
manufacturer shall afford the inspector reasonable facilities to be satisfied that the structural product
is being furnished in accordance with this requirements specification. Any rejection based upon
product analysis made in accordance with the applicable product specification must be reported to
the supplier, and samples that represent the rejected structural product shall be preserved for 2
weeks from the date of notification of such rejection.
h) Identification of Materials: The required plate markings must be in accordance with ASTM des-
ignation (year-date not required); G or MT if applicable; heat number; size and thickness; and
name, brand, or trademark of the manufacturer (for plates produced from an as-rolled structural
product) or the processor (for plates produced from coils). Materials that are required to be heat
treated, but have not been heat treated, are marked with the letter G (denoting green), except if
G marking is not necessary, when such plates are for shipment for the purpose of obtaining the
required heat treatment, by another organization under the manufacturers control.
Materials that are required to be heat treated, and have been heat treated, are marked by the pro-
cessor that performed the heat treatment, with the letter MT (denoting material treated). The re-
quired markings for plates shall be in at least one place on each finished plate. The manufacturer or
processor have the option of placing such markings on only the top piece of each lift, or of showing
such markings on a substantial tag attached to each lift, unless otherwise specified.
i) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this Section indicates consecutively, the required quality dimen-
sions, permitted variations, minimum number of tests required, minimum number of coils to be ten-
sion tested, permitted variation in weight, width and length, permitted variations in diameter for Gas-

Cut circular and rectangular plates, permitted camber according to thickness, standard flatness,
permitted variations in cross-sections of structural angles, tees, W, HP, S, M, C, MC shapes and
rolled steel bars, with permitted dimensional variations, permitted variations for rectangular carbon,
alloy and high-strength low-alloy steel plates and finally tables with dimensions of steel shapes.
j) Supplementary Requirements: The standardized supplementary requirements are used, when

desired by the purchaser and is applied only when specified in the order. The main supplementary
requirements are, Vacuum Treatment, Product Analysis, Post-Weld Heat Treatment, Charpy V-
Notch Impact Test, Drop-Weight Test to Method E208, Ultrasonic Examination, Reduction of Area
Measurement, Maximum Tensile Strength, Copper-Bearing Steel (for atmospheric corrosion re-
sistance), Material-Marking of Individual Pieces, Fine Austenitic Grain Size and Maximum Carbon
Equivalent for Weldability.
2) SA-20/SA-20M - General Requirements of Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels:
This specification covers a group of materials that apply to rolled steel plates for pressure vessels
covered by each of the following product specifications issued by ASTM. These materials are in-
tended to be suitable for fusion welding, with a welding procedure suitable for the grade of steel and
intended use or service will be utilized. The materials and tests covered by SA-20 are shown below:
202/A - 202M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Manganese-Silicon;
A 203 - A - 203M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Nickel;
A 204 - A 204M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Molybdenum;
A 225 - A 225M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Vanadium-Nickel;
A 285 - A 285M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low- and Intermediate-Tensile Strength;
A 299 - A 299M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Silicon;
A 302 - A 302M Specif. for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Moly., and Manganese-Moly.-Nickel;
A 353 - A 353M Specif. for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, 9 Percent Nickel, Double-Normalized and Tempered;
A 370 - Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products;
A 387 - A 387M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum;
A 435 - A 435M - Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates;
A 455 - A 455M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High-Strength Manganese;
A 515 - A 515M Specif. for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Service;
A 516 - A 516M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-Temperature Service;
A 517 - A 517M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, High-Strength, Quenched and Tempered;
A 533 - A 533M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered, Manganese-Molybde-
num and Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel;
A 537 - A 537M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel;
A 542 - A 542M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched-and-Tempered, Chromium-Molybde-
num, and Chromium-Molybdenum-Vanadium;
A 543 - A 543M - Specif. for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered Nickel-Chromium-Moly.;
A 553 - A 553M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered 8 and 9% Nickel;
A 562 - A 562M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Titanium for Glass or Diffused Me-
tallic Coatings;
A 577 - A 577M - Specification for Ultrasonic Angle-Beam Examination of Steel Plates;
A 578 - A 578M Specif. for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Plain and Clad Steel Plates for Special Applications;
A 612 - A 612M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High Strength, for Moderate and Lower Temper-
ature Service;
A 645 - A 645M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, 5% and Nickel Alloy Steels, Especially Heat Treated;
A 662 - A 662M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel, for Moderate and Lower
Temperature Service;
A 700 - Practices for Packaging, Marking, and Loading Methods for Steel Products for Shipment;

A 724 - A 724M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel, Quenched and Tempered,
for Welded Pressure Vessels;
A 734 - A 734M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel and High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel, Quenched-and-
Tempered;
A 735 - A 735M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Low-Carbon Manganese-Molybdenum-Columbium Alloy Steel,
for Moderate and Lower Temperature Service;
A 736 - A 736M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Low-Carbon Age-Hardening Nickel-Copper-Chromium-Moly-
bdenum-Columbium and Nickel-Copper-Manganese-Molybdenum-Columbium Alloy Steel;
A 737 - A 737M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, High-Strength, Low-Alloy Steel;
A 738 - A 738M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel, for Moderate
and Lower Temperature Service;
A 751 - Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel Products;
A 770 - A 770M - Specification for Through-Thickness Tension Testing of Steel Plates for Special Applications;
A 782 - A 782M - Specification for Pressure-Vessel Plates, Quenched-and-Tempered, Manganese-Chromium-Molybde-
num-Silicon Zirconium Alloy Steel A 832/A 832M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Moly-
bdenum-Vanadium;
A 841 - A 841M - Specif. for Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels, Produced by Thermo-Mechanical Control Process (TMCP);
A 844 - A 844M - Specification for Steel Plates, 9 % Nickel Alloy, for Pressure Vessels, Produced by the Direct-Quenching
Process;
A 941 - Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel, Related Alloys, and Ferroalloys;
A 1017 - A 1017M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum-Tungsten;
A 1041 - A 1041M Specif. for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Higher Strength Chromium-Molybdenum-Tungsten;
E 21 - Test Methods for Elevated Temperature Tension Tests of Metallic Materials;
E 29 - Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to Determine Conformance with Specifications;
E 112 - Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size;
E 208 - Test Method for Conducting Drop-Weight Test to Determine Nil-Ductility Transition Temperature of Ferritic Steels;
E 709 - Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination.
a) Metallurgical Fabrication: These materials are intended to be suitable for fabrication of pressure
vessels and fusion welding, made in open-hearth, basic oxygen, or electric-arc furnace, followed by
additional refining in a Ladle Metallurgy Furnace (LMF), or another method. Additional requirements
specified in a purchase order, and accepted by the supplier are permitted, since that these require-
ments follow this specification, or the applicable product needs.
b) Manufacturing: Conversion of steel ingots or slabs, by hot rolling, into plate-as-rolled or into coil;
and for plates produced from plate-as-rolled. Such finishing operations also include leveling, cutting
to length, testing, inspection, conditioning, heat treatment (if applicable), packaging, marking, load-
ing for shipment, and certification.
Coil: Hot-rolled steel in coil form for processing into finished plates.
Hot Forming: Forming operation producing permanent deformation, performed after the
plate has been heated to the temperature required to produce grain refinement.
c) Chemical Analysis: Sampling for chemical analysis and methods of analysis must be in accord-
ance with Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751. The heat analysis must include deter-
mination of the content of carbon, manganese, phosphorus, sulfur, silicon, nickel, chromium, molyb-
denum, copper, vanadium, and columbium. If the aluminum content is to be used in place of austen-
itic grain size testing, it must be specified in the purchase order.
d) Metallurgical Structure: When the austenitic grain size testing is required, such testing must be
in accordance with Test Methods E 112, Plate IV, by carburizing for 8 h at 1700F [925C]. At least

70% of the grains in the area examined shall conform to the specified grain size requirement, and
one test per heat must be made.
Coarse Austenitic Grain Size: When coarse austenitic grain size is specified, the steel
must approach a carburized austenitic grain size number in the range from 1 to 5, inclusive,
as determined by the McQuaid-Ehn Test.
Fine Austenitic Grain Size: If fine austenitic grain size is specified, aluminum can be used
as the grain refining element, to be fulfilled on heat analysis. The aluminum content must be
defined not less than 0.020%, or alternatively, 0.015% acid soluble aluminum, specified in
the purchase order.
e) Heat Treatment: When required by the purchaser, to achieve specified mechanical properties,
cooling rates faster than those obtained by cooling in air are permissible, since the plates are sub-
sequently tempered in the temperature range from 1100 to 1300F [595 to 705C]. However, when
no heat treatment is required, the manufacturer or processor has the option of heat treating the
structural product by normalizing, stress relieving, or normalizing and then stress relieving to meet
the applicable product specification.
f) Welding Requirements: When the steel is to be welded, it is presupposed that a welding proce-
dure suitable for the grade of steel and intended use or service will be utilized. Welding must be in
accordance with a welding procedure specification (WPS) using Shielded Metal Arc Welding
SMAW), Gas Metal Arc W elding (GMAW), Flux-Cored Arc Welding (FCAW), or Submerged Arc
Welding (SAW) processes. Shielding gases used shall be of welding quality. Electrodes and elec-
trode-flux combinations must be in accordance with the requirements of AWS Specification A5.1,
5.5, A5.17, A5.18, A5.20, A5.23, A5.28, or A5.29, whichever is applicable. For SMAW, low hydrogen
electrodes shall be used.
The weld metal must have the A-number analysis corresponding to the equivalent ASME P-number
of the plate, except that A-1 or A-2 analysis weld metal may be employed for P-1 plates. Other weld
metals that are compatible with the plate may be employed, when approved by the purchaser in-
spection or manufacturing Inspectors, since the application can be qualified in accordance with the
requirements of Section IX of the ASME Code.
Electrodes and electrode-flux combinations can be selected so that, the tensile strength of the de-
posited weld metal (after a required heat treatment) is consistent with the tensile strength specified
for the base metal being repaired. The welding electrodes and flux materials shall be dry and pro-
tected from moisture during storage and use. Prior to repair welding, the surface to be welded shall
be inspected to avoid surface imperfections.
Welders and welding operators must be qualified in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWS
D1.1 or ASME Section IX, except when a groove weld qualification, may qualify the welder to per-
form the welding. The WPS may include a welding qualification by Charpy V-notch testing, when
specified in the purchase order. The heat-affected zone, and the plate, and the test results shall be
reported to the purchaser.

When the manufacturing plate should be subjected to normalizing, quenching and tempering, hot-
forming, or post-weld heat treating, the welding procedure qualification test plates and the weld re-
paired plate shall be subjected to a thermal heat treatment. Repairs must be in accordance with a
welding procedure specification (WPS), according to the requirements of the ANSI/AWS D1.1 or
ASME Section IX.
g) Inspection and Tests: All tests must be conducted in accordance with Test Methods and Defini-
tions A 370. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free entry, at all times, to all parts
of the manufacturers works that concern the manufacture of the structural product ordered. The
manufacturer must give to the inspector reasonable facilities, the way the structural product is being
furnished in accordance with this requirements specification. Any rejection based upon product
analysis made in accordance with the applicable product specification must be reported to the sup-
plier, and samples that represent the rejected structural product shall be preserved for 2 weeks from
the date of notification of such rejection.
Yield Strength: Must be determined by either the 0.2% offset method or the 0.5% extension
under load method, unless otherwise stated in the applicable product specification.
Rolled Plates with Heat Treatment: Two tension test coupons shall be taken from each
quenched and tempered plate, as heat treated.
Coil Plates by other than Stress Relieving: For other than quenched and tempered plates,
only one tension test coupon from each coil.
Coil Plates without Heat Treatment: Plates produced from coils with stress relieving only,
must have a minimum of three tension coupons. The first test coupon is taken prior to the
first plate to be qualified, the second test coupon is taken from the approximate center lap,
and the third test coupon is taken after the last plate to be qualified. If, during decoiling, the
amount of material decoiled is less than that required to reach the next standard test, the test
for qualification of a particular portion of the coil should be made from a test coupon taken
from a location adjacent to the innermost portion decoiled.
Charpy V-Notch Tests: Except for quenched and tempered plates, one impact test (3 spec-
imens) for each specified orientation must be made from each plate-as rolled. For quenched
and tempered plates, one impact test can be made from each plate, as heat treated.
Test Specimens: For plates over 3/4 in. [20 mm], up to 4 inches in thickness, tension test
specimens must conform to the requirements for the 0.500 in. [12.5 mm] diameter test spec-
imen. For plates up to 4 in. [100 mm], inclusive, in thickness, tension test specimens may be
the full thickness of the plate and conform to the requirements for the 1 1/2 in. [40 mm] wide
rectangular tension test specimen if adequate testing machine capacity is available, of Meth-
ods and Definitions A 370.
h) Identification of Materials: The required plate markings must be in accordance with ASTM des-
ignation (year-date not required); G or MT if applicable; grade, type, and class; heat number;
plate identifier; and name, brand, or trademark of the manufacturer (for plates produced in discrete
cut lengths of flat product) or the processor (for plates produced from coil and for subdivided plates.
Plates that are required to be heat treated, but have not been heat treated, must be marked with the
letter G (denoting green), except if G marking is not necessary, when such plates are for ship-

ment for the purpose of obtaining the required heat treatment, by another organization under the
manufacturers control.
Plates that are required to be heat treated, and have been heat treated, are marked by the proces-
sor that performed the heat treatment, with the letter MT (denoting material treated). The required
markings for plates can be in at least one place on each finished plate. The manufacturer or proces-
sor have the option of placing such markings on only the top piece of each lift, or of showing such
markings on a substantial tag attached to each lift, unless otherwise specified.
i) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this Section indicates consecutively, the required quality dimen-
sions, and chemical elements permitted variations. Table 1, Chemical elements limits, Table 2, Max-
imum carbon equivalent for weldability, Table 3, and Table 4, Permissible variations from flatness
for carbon steel plates as-rolled or normalized ordered to restrictive flatness, Table 5, Permissible
variations from flatness for high-strength, Table 6, Permissible variations from flatness for high-
strength low-alloy steel plates as-rolled or normalized ordered to restrictive flatness.
j) Supplementary Requirements: The standardized supplementary requirements are used, when

desired by the purchaser, applied only when specified in the order, as follows: Vacuum Treatment,
Product Analysis, Simulated Post-Weld Heat Treatment of Mechanical Test Coupons, Additional
Tension Test, Charpy V-Notch Impact Test, Drop-Weight Test (for Plates 0.625 in. [16 mm] and
Over in Thickness), High-Temperature Tension Tests, Ultrasonic Examination in Accordance with A
435/A 435M, Magnetic Particle Examination.
k) Supplementary Tests: Charpy V-Notch Impact Transition Curve, Ultrasonic Examination in Ac-
cordance with A 577/A 577M, Ultrasonic Examination in Accordance with A 578/A 578M, NDT Tem-
perature Determination, Reduction of Area Measurement, Thermal Stress Relief of Mechanical Test
Coupons, Vacuum Carbon-Deoxidized Steel, Restricted Chemical Requirements, Maximum Carbon
Equivalent for Weldability, Restricted Limits on Elements, Through-Thickness Tension Tests, Strain
Age Test, Weldability, Low-Sulfur Steels, Restrictive Plate Flatness, and Heat Treatment in the
Working Zone of a Surveyed Furnace.
l) Annexes A1: The annexes are defined as mandatory information, and listed are tables with per-
missible variations in dimensions and notch toughness indication, in which event the specified tests
shall be made by the manufacturer or processor before shipment of the plates. From Table A1.1,
Permissible variations in thickness for rectangular plates, Permissible variations in width and length
for sheared plates 1 in. and under in thickness; Permissible variations for universal mill plates 2
and under thickness, gas-cut carbon and high-strength low-alloy steel plates, waviness tolerances,
V-notch tolerances, to A1.17 variations in width for mill carbon steel and high-alloy strip mills plates.
m) Annexes A2: Listed herein are permissible variations in dimensions, and notch toughness in-
formation. From Table A2.1, variations in thickness for rectangular plates, sheared plates, universal
plates, variations in diameter, permissible camber, variations for flatness, waviness, V-notch re-
quirements, to Table A2.16, variations in width for mill carbon steel and high-alloy strip mills plates.
n) Appendices: Indicated as non-mandatory information, the Appendix X1 provides information on

coil as a source of plates for pressure vessels. The Appendix X2 provides information on the varia-

bility of tensile properties in plates for pressure vessels, and conformance to the applicable product
specification. The Appendix X3 provides information on the variability of Charpy-V-Notch impact test
properties in plates for pressure vessels. The Appendix X4 provides information on cold bending of
plates, including suggested minimum inside radii for cold bending.
3) SA-29/SA-29M Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought:
This specification covers a group of common requirements, which must apply to carbon and alloy
steel bars under each of the following ASTM/ASME specifications, unless otherwise specified in an
appropriate specification. Materials and tests covered by SA-29 are shown below:
A 108 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished;

A 304 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Bars Subject to End-Quench Hardenability Requirements;
A 311 /A 311M Specif. for Cold-Drawn, Stress-Relieved Carbon Steel Bars Subject to Mechanical Properties;
A 321 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Quenched and Tempered;
A 322 Specification for Steel Bars, Alloy, Standard Grades;
A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products;
A 434 Specification for Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought or Cold-Finished, Quenched and Tempered;
A 499 Specification for Steel Bars and Shapes, Carbon Rolled from T Rails;
A 575 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades;
A 576 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality;
A 663/A 663M Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, Mechanical Properties;
A 675/A 675M Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, Mechanical Properties;
A 689 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Bars for Springs;
A 696 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought or Cold-Finished, Special Quality for Pressure Piping
Components;
A 700 Practices for Packaging, Marking, and Loading Methods for Steel Products for Domestic Shipment;
A 739 Specif. for Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought, for Elevated Temperature or Pressure-Containing Parts;
A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel Products;
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to Determine Conformance with Specifications;
E 112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size;
a) Chemical Composition: Must conform to the requirements specified in the purchase order or the
individual product specifications. Bars may be ordered to these grade designations and when so or-
dered must conform to the specified limits by heat analysis. The chemical composition of each heat
or cast is determined by the manufacturer in accordance with Test Methods, Practices, according to
Terminology A 751.
b) Product Analysis: Merchant quality carbon bar steel is not subject to rejection for product analy-
sis unless misapplication of a heat is clearly indicated in the purchase order. The determined chemi-
cal composition may not vary from the specified limits, by more than the amounts prescribed in Ta-
ble 5 and Table 6 of this Section, but the lead, cannot vary both above and below the specified
range. To be known that rimmed or cap-ped steel is characterized by a lack of homogeneity in its
composition, especially for the elements carbon, phosphorus, and sulfur.
c) Metallurgical Structure: When the austenitic grain size testing is required, such testing can be in
accordance with Test Methods E 112, Plate IV, by carburizing for 8 h at 1700F [925C]. At least

70% of the grains in the area examined shall conform to the specified grain size requirement, and
one test per heat must be made.
Coarse Austenitic Grain Size: When coarse austenitic grain size is specified, the steel
must approach a carburized austenitic grain size number in the range from 1 to 5, inclusive,
as determined by the McQuaid-Ehn Test.
Fine Austenitic Grain Size: If fine austenitic grain size is specified, aluminum is used as the
grain refining element, to be fulfilled on heat analysis. The aluminum content must be de-
fined not less than 0.020%, or alternatively, 0.015% acid soluble aluminum, specified in the
purchase order.
Note: Columbium or vanadium or both may be used for grain refining instead of aluminum. When
columbium or vanadium is used as a grain refining element, the content of the elements shall be r e-
ported with the heat analysis.
d) Inspection and Tests: All tests must be conducted in accordance with Test Methods and Defini-
tions A 370. The manufacturer must give to the inspector reasonable facilities, the way the structural
product is being furnished in accordance with this requirements specification. Any rejection based
upon product analysis made in accordance with the applicable product specification must be report-
ed to the supplier, and samples that represent the rejected structural product must be preserved for
2 weeks from the date of notification of such rejection.
If the percentage elongation of any tension specimen, including wrought materials and thermally
treated bars, is less than that specified, and any part of the fracture is more than 3/4 in. [20 mm]
from the center of a 2 in. [50 mm] specimen, or is outside the middle half of the g age length of an 8
in. [200 mm], as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before testing, a retest can
be allowed. If a bend specimen fails, due to more severe conditions of bending than required, then a
retest is also permitted.
e) Identification of Materials: The method of marking is at the manufacturers option and may be
made by hot stamping, cold stamping, painting, or marking tags attached to the lifts of bars. Bar
code marking may be used as an auxiliary method of identification of the 3-of-9 type, conform to
AIAG B1. When barcoded tags are used, must conform to AIAG B5 (Bar Code Symbology Standard
for 3 of 9 Bar Codes). AIAG - Automotive Industry Action Group.
f) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this section indicates consecutively, the required quality dimen-
sions, and chemical elements permitted variations. Table 1, Grade designations and chemical ele-
ments limits, Table 2, Grade designations and chemical compositions for alloy steel bars, Table 3,
and Table 4, Heat analysis, chemical ranges and limits for carbon and alloy steel bars, Table 5, and
Table 6, Permissible variations for product analysis for carbon and alloy steel.
g) Supplementary Requirements & Annexes: Are applied only when specified by the purchaser in
the contract or order, non-mandatory. Table S1.1, thickness and width tolerances for hot-wrought
square and round-edge flat bars to 0.3 mm under tolerance. In the annexes, from Table A1.1 to
A1.10 are the permissible variations for hot-wrought round, square and cornered steel bars. From
Table A2.1 to A2.10 are the dimensional tolerances round, square and hot-wrought steel bars.

4) SA-31 Specification for Steel Rivets and Bars for Rivets, Pressure Vessels:
This specification covers steel rivets for use in boilers and pressure vessels and steel bars for use in
the manufacture of rivets. Two grades are covered:
Grade A: Bars having a yield point of 23 000 psi (160 MPa) min. with no controls on carbon content.
Grade B: Bars having a yield point of 29 000 psi (200 MPa) min. with carbon 0.28% maximum.
ASME Standards:
B18.1.1: Small Solid Rivets 7/16 Inch Nominal Diameter and Smaller;
B18.1.2: Large Rivets 1/2 Inch Nominal Diameter and Larger;
B18.24: Part Identifying Number (PIN) Code System Standard for B18 Fastener Products.
a) Materials and Manufacture: Rivets must be manufactured from rivet bars conforming to the ap-
plicable grade ordered, by hot- or cold-heading. Bars are furnished as rolled and not pickled, blast
cleaned, or oiled. At producers option, bars may be cleaned for inspection or cold drawn.
b) Test and Inspection: Test specimen selection and preparation must be in accordance with
Specification A 29/A 29M and Test Methods and Definitions A 370. Rivet bend and flattening tests
shall be in accordance with the manufacturers standard test procedures.
c) Manufacturing Tables: Is necessary a certification that the material was manufactured and test-
ed in accordance with this specification with a report of the heat-analysis and mechanical property.
Table 1, Chemical Requirements; Table 2, Bend Requirements, Rivets; Table 3, Tensile Require-
ments, Bars; Table 4, Bend Requirements, Bars; Table 5 Permissible Variations in Sizes.
5) SA-36/SA-36M Specification for Carbon Structural Steel:
This specification covers carbon steel shapes, plates, and bars of structural quality for use in rivet-
ed, bolted, or welded construction of bridges and buildings, and for general structural purposes. The
materials and tests covered by SA-36 are shown below:
A 6/A 6M - General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling;
A 27/A 27M - Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application;
307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 psi Tensile Strength;
A 325 - Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi, Minimum Tensile Strength;
A 325M - Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat-Treated 830 MPa, Minimum Tensile Strength [Metric];
A 500 Spec. for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
A 501 - Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing;
A 502 -Specification for Rivets, Steel, Structural;
A 563 - Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts;
A 563M - Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric];
A 668/A 668M - Specification for Steel Forgings, Carbon and Alloy, for General Industrial Use;
A 1011/A 1011M - Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural High Strength Low
Alloy, and High Strength Low Alloy with Improved Formability;
F 568M - Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Metric Fasteners.

The standard specification SA-36 is indicated for general construction such as bars; bolted construc-
tion; bridges; buildings; carbon plates; riveted construction; steel shapes; structural steel, and weld-
ed construction. The specifications indicated in Table 1 are: Steel rivets A 502-Grade 1; Bolts A 307-
Grade A or F 568M-Class 4.6; High-strength bolts A 325 or A 325M; Steel nuts A 563 or A 563M;
Cast steel A 27/A 27M-Grade 6535; Forgings (carbon steel) A 668-Class D; Hot-rolled sheets and
strip A 1011/A 1011M-SS Grade-36 - Type 1 or Type 2 or A 1018/A 1018M SS Grade-36; Cold-
formed tubing A 500-Grade B; Hot-formed tubing A 501; Anchor bolts F 1554.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel is semi-killed or killed, used for plates and bars with
thickness over 1/2 in. [12.5 mm], and shapes with flange or leg thicknesses over 1 in. [25 mm].
b) Chemical Composition: The heat analysis shall conform to the requirements prescribed in Ta-
ble 2, subject to the product analysis tolerances in Specification A 6/A 6M.
c) Inspection and Tests: The material as represented by the test specimen must conform to the
requirements as to the tensile properties prescribed in Table 3 of this Section. Plates and bars with
cross sections less than 1 in. [645 mm], other than flats, and thickness or diameter less than 1/2 in.
[12.5 mm], need not be subjected to tension tests by the manufacturer, since the chemical composi-
tion used, is appropriate for obtaining the tensile properties.
d) Manufacturing Tables: Is recommended a certification that the material must be manufactured

and tested in accordance with this specification with a report of the heat-analysis and mechanical
property, Table 2, Chemical Requirements; Table 3, Tensile Requirements. All inspection, tests and
supplementary requirements, at the option of the purchaser, are listed in Specification A 6/A 6M.
6) SA-47/SA-47M Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings:
This specification covers ferritic malleable castings for general use at temperatures from normal
ambient to approximately 400C (750F). Castings under this specification are classified under two
grades based on tests on separately cast test bars, Grade 32510 and Grade 22010. The first three
digits of the grade designation indicate the minimum yield strength (x 100 psi [MPa]) and the last
two digits indicate the minimum elongation (% in 2 in. [50 mm]). The materials and tests covered by
SA-47 are shown below:
A 153 - Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware;
A 247 - Test Method for Evaluating the Microstructure of Graphite in Iron Castings;
A 644 - Terminology Relating to Iron Castings;
E 8 - Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials;
E 10 -Test Method for Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materials;
E 18 - Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials;
E 140 - Hardness Conversion Tables for Metals.
a) Chemical Composition: Must conform to the requirements specified in the purchase order or the
individual product specifications. The chemical composition of the iron must be ordered to produce
structural and mechanical properties, conform to the specified limits by heat analysis. The chemical
composition of each cast is determined by the manufacturer, according to Test Methods, Practices,
and Terminology A 751.

b) Microstructure Requirements: The microstructure of the malleable iron consists of temper car-
bon nodules distributed through a ferritic matrix and shall be free of excessive pearlite, massive car-
bides, and primary graphite. When agreed upon by the purchaser and producer, the maximum de-
carburization at any as-cast surface after heat treatment may be stipulated in writing, as measured
by visual depletion of combined carbon after polishing, etching in nital, and viewing at 100x.
c) Inspection and Tests: All tests must be conducted in accordance with Test Methods E 8, E 10
and E 18. Unless otherwise specified in the purchase order, the manufacturer is responsible for car-
rying out all the tests and inspections required by this specification, using his own or other reliable
facilities, and must maintain complete records of all such tests and inspections. Any rejection based
upon product analysis made in accordance with the applicable product specification must be report-
ed to the supplier. Samples that represent the rejected structural product must be preserved for 2
weeks from the date of notification of such rejection.
All test specimens are heat-treated in the same furnaces, as the castings they represent. The time
cycle for tempering the test specimens may be altered, in order to obtain similar microstructures or
hardness, in both specimen and castings. If, after testing, a specimen shows evidence of a defect,
another tension test may be made on another specimen. Also, a retest is permitted whenever frac-
ture occurs outside the central 50% of the gage length.
The tension test specimens are cast according to the form and dimensions, using the same molding
material used for the production castings. At least three such specimens have to be cast from a rep-
resentative ladle of iron either from a batch-melted heat or, in continuous melting, from each 4 h
pour period. The values for yield point and yield strength are not identical and commonly are suffi-
ciently close for most applications of ferritic malleable irons to be used interchangeably, by rule, de-
termined by Test Methods E 8.
d) Hardness Test: When the purchase order requires hardness testing, the acceptable hardness
range uses the Brinell Test Method E 10, or in special cases the Rockwell Test Methods E 18 may
be used, with an appropriate Rockwell scale. For castings of a size or shape that do not permit
Brinell testing with the standard 3000-kgf load, the 500 kgf may be employed, and reported as HB
10/500/15. Castings failing to conform to the required hardness range must be retreated and retest-
ed. If after reheat treating they still fail the hardness requirements, the castings can be rejected.
e) Certification and Identification Marking: A manufacturers certification or compliance must

state that the casting or lot of castings was made, sampled, tested, and inspected in accordance
with this specification, including a report of test results signed by an authorized agent of the manu-
facturer, to be furnished at the time of shipment. Each casting must bear the identifying mark of the
manufacturer and the pattern number, at such a discrete location that the identification cannot inter-
fere with subsequent processing and service of the casting.
f) Manufacturing Tables: Composed of Table 1, Tension Test Requirements; Table 2, Typical

Hardness; Table 3, Permissible Variations in Sizes. Supplementary Requirements & Appendix: S1
indicates special order conditions in hardness dimensions, surface quality, or a combination of con-
ditions. S2, when requested, test lugs may be cast on all castings. S3, casting may be tested to de-

struction, S4, machined specimens from castings, S5, castings may be zinc-coated (Specification A
153), S6, is for government procurement. The appendix is non-mandatory information.
7) SA-53/SA-53M Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless:
This specification covers seamless and welded black and hot-dipped galvanized steel pipe in NPS
1/8 to NPS 26 (DN 6 to DN 650). Pipe ordered under this specification is intended for mechanical
and pressure applications, also acceptable for ordinary uses in steam, water, gas, and air lines. This
pipe specification is suitable for welding, forming operations involving coiling, bending, and flanging,
and covers the following types and grades of pipes:
Type F: Furnace-butt welded, continuous welded Grade A;

Type E: Electric-resistance welded, Grades A and B;
Type S: Seamless, Grades A and B.
Note: The designations NPS (nominal pipe size) and DN (diameter nominal) were substituted in this
specification by traditional terms as nominal diameter, size, and nominal size.
Type F is not intended for flanging. When Types S and E are required for close coiling or cold bend-
ing, Grade A must be the preferred grade. Type E may be furnished either non-expanded or cold
expanded. The materials and tests covered by SA-53 are shown below:
A 90/A 90M - Test Method for Weight of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings;
A 530/A 530M - Specification for General Requirements for Specialized Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe;
A 700 - Practices for Packaging, Marking, and Loading Methods for Steel Products for Domestic Shipment;
A 865 - Specification for Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black or Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded or Seamless,
for Use in Steel Pipe Joints;
B 6 - Specification for Zinc Application;
E 213 - Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal Pipe and Tubing;
E 309 - Practice for Eddy-Current Examination of Steel Tubular Products Using Magnetic Saturation;
E 570 - Practice for Flux Leakage Examination of Ferromagnetic Steel Tubular Products;
E 1806 - Practice for Sampling Steel and Iron for Determination of Chemical Composition;
ASME B36.10 - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe;
ANSI ASC X12, B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose;
API Standard - 5L Specification for Line Pipe.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The fabrication is for both seamless and welded pipes, made by
one or more of the following processes; open-hearth, electric-furnace, or basic-oxygen. The weld
seam of electric-resistance welded pipe in Grade B must be heat treated to a minimum of 1000F
[540C] the way that no untempered martensite remains. For cold expanded pipe it must not exceed
1 1/2% of the outside diameter pipe size.

b) Chemical Analysis: Sampling for chemical analysis and methods of analysis must be in accord-
ance with Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751. The analyses, so determined, are con-
forming to the heat analysis requirements for the applicable grade, class, and type of material, sub-
ject to permitted variations. If a range is specified, the requirements of any element in a heat treat-
ment cannot vary above and below the specified range.
c) Product Analysis: Merchant quality carbon steel is not subject to rejection for product analysis
unless misapplication of a heat is clearly indicated in the purchase order. The analysis of two pipes
is permitted from each lot of 500 lengths, or a fraction. Samples for chemical analysis, except for
spectrographic analysis, are taken in accordance with Practice E 1806. The chemical composition
thus determined must conform to the requirements specified in Table 1.
d) Inspection and Tests: All tests must be conducted in accordance with Test Methods and Defini-
tions A 370. The manufacturer must give to the inspector reasonable facilities, the way that the
structural product is being furnished in accordance with this requirements specification. Transverse
tension test for electric welded pipe is required for NPS 8 [DN 200] and larger, and specimens must
be approximately 1 1/2 in. [40 m] wide in the gage length, representing the full wall thickness of the
pipe. Test specimen taken across a pipe weld is not required for pipe under NPS 8 [DN 200].
e) Bending and Flattening Tests: For bending requirements of NPS 2 [DN 50] pipe and under, a
sufficient length may be bent cold through a 90, around a cylindrical mandrel, which diameter is
twelve times the outside diameter of the pipe, without developing cracks and opening the weld. For
close coiling, the pipe may be bent cold through a 180, around a cylindrical mandrel, which diame-
ter is eight times the outside diameter of the pipe, without failure. Double-extra-strong pipe over
NPS 1 1/4 [DN 32] need not be subjected to the bend test. Flattening tests should be made on pipes
over NPS 2 [DN 50] with all thicknesses, extra strong and lighter.
Seamless Pipe: For seamless pipe, a test specimen at least 2 1/2 in. [60 mm] in length can
be flattened cold between parallel plates in two steps. The first step is a test for pipe ductility,
no cracks or breaks can appear inside or outside. The second step is a test for fabrication
soundness, and the flattening can continue until the test specimen breaks totally closing the
opposite sides of the pipe. Evidence of laminated or unsound material that is revealed during
the entire flattening test, are causes for rejection.
Electric-Resistance-Welded Pipe: A test specimen at least 4 in. [100 mm] in length can be
flattened cold between parallel plates in three steps, with the weld located either 0 or 90
from the line of direction of force, whichever is applicable. The first step is a test for ductility
of the weld, and no cracks or breaks can appear inside or outside the surfaces, until the dis-
tance between the plates is less than two thirds of the pipe diameter. The second step, the
flattening is a test for weld ductility, and no cracks or breaks can appear inside or outside the
surfaces of the weld. The third step is for welding soundness, when the flattening test can
continue until the specimen breaks or the opposite walls of the pipe meet each other.
Continuous-Welded Pipe: A test specimen at least 4 in. [100 mm] in length can be cold flat-
tened in three steps, with the weld located either 0 or 90 from the line of direction of force.
The first step is a test for weld ductility, and no cracks or breaks can appear inside or outside

the surfaces, until the distance between the plates is less than three fourths of the pipe di-
ameter. The second step is still a test for weld ductility, and no cracks or breaks must appear
inside, outside or end surfaces, until the distance between the plates is less than 60% of the
outside pipe diameter. The third step is for welding soundness, when the flattening test can
continue until the specimen breaks or the opposite walls of the pipe meet each other.
f) Hydrostatic Tests: Each length of plain-end pipe can be hydrostatically tested to the pressures
prescribed in Table X2.2, and Table X2.3 for each threaded and coupled length, and permissible to
test the pipe in either single lengths or multiple lengths. The minimum hydrostatic test need not ex-
ceed 2,500 psi [17,200 kPa] for pipe up to NPS 3 [DN 80], nor 2,800 psi [19,300 kPa] for all sizes
over NPS 3 [DN 80], or a higher pressure at the manufacturers option. The hydrostatic pressure
shall be maintained for not less than 5s for all sizes of seamless and electric-welded-pipe.
g) Nondestructive Electric Tests: The weld seam of each length of ERW pipe (Type E) from NPS
2 [DN 50] and larger and, when specified by the purchaser, the full body of each seamless pipe (as
an alternative to the Hydrostatic test), should be tested with a Nondestructive Electric Test (NDE),
and the lengths shall be marked with the letters NDE, also shown in the material certification.
Obs.: The NDT inspection tests are E 213, Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal
Pipe and Tubing; E 309, Standard Practice for Eddy-Current Examination of Steel Tubular Products
Using Magnetic Saturation; or E 570, Standard Practice for Flux Leakage Examination of Ferromag-
netic Steel Tubular Products.
h) Ultrasonic and Electromagnetic Inspection: Each length of ERW pipe NPS 2 [DN 50] and
larger must be tested utilizing the ultrasonic or electromagnetic principles capable of detecting the
presence of significant longitudinally or circumferentially surface flaws and imperfections of the unin-
terrupted weld seam. The length of the reference standards may be determined at the option of the
pipe manufacturer.
Note: Specialist contractors in NDT commonly perform Eddy Current (ET), Remote Field Eddy Cur-
rent (RFET) and Magnetic Flux Leakage (MFL) which are tube inspection methods for pits, cracks,
corrosion and wear. IRIS is an ultrasonic inspection of tubes. RFET may be used to pick up indica-
tions, followed by IRIS for defect sizing.
i) Permissible Variations in Weight and Dimensions: The weight of the pipe as specified in
ASME B36.10M cannot vary by more than 10%. For pipe NPS 1 1/2 [DN 40] and under, the out-
side diameter at any point cannot vary more than 1/64 in. [0.4 mm]. For pipe NPS 2 [DN 50] and
over, the outside diameter cannot vary more than 1%. The minimum wall thickness at any point
cannot more than 12.5% under the nominal wall thickness specified.
j) Pipe Lengths: Pipe of weights lighter than extra strong shall be in lengths of 16 to 22 ft [4.88 to
6.71 m], but not more than 5% of the total number of threaded lengths are permitted to be jointers
(two pieces coupled together). When ordered with plain ends, 5% are permitted to be in lengths of
12 to 16 ft [3.66 to 4.88 m]. Extra-strong and heavier weights must be in lengths of 12 to 22 ft [3.66
to 6.71 m], and 5% are permitted to be in lengths of 6 to 12 ft [1.83 to 3.66 m].

k) Pipe-End Finish: Unless otherwise specified, NPS 1 1/2 [DN 40] and smaller, the pipe-end finish
may be at the option of the manufacturer. NPS 2 [DN 50] and larger, standard or extra strong
weights, or with wall thickness less than 0.500 in. [12.7 mm], must be plain-end, beveled to an angle
of 30, +5, -0, with a root face of 1/16 in. 1/32 in. [1.6 mm 0.8 mm]. Wall thicknesses over
0.500 in. [12.7 mm], and all double extra strong, must be plain-end square cut.
With threaded ends, for standard-weight pipe NPS 6 [DN 150] and smaller, see Table X3.1 for
threading data. NPS 8 [DN 200] and larger including all sizes of extra-strong weight and double ex-
tra-strong weight, see Table X3.2. The gaging practice and tolerances must be according to ANSI
B1.20.1. Threaded pipe NPS 4 [DN 100] and larger must have thread protectors on the ends.
When ordered with couplings, one end of each length of pipe must have a coupling in accordance
with Specification A 865, and coupling threads according to ANSI B1.20.1. Taper-tapped couplings
may be furnished on all weights of threaded pipe sizes NPS 2 1/2 [DN 65] and larger. NPS 2 [DN
50] and smaller, may be straight-tapped couplings for standard-weight pipe, and taper-tapped cou-
plings for extra-strong and double extra-strong pipe. If taper-tapped couplings are required for pipe
NPS 2 [DN 50] and smaller on standard-weight pipes, it is recommended that the threads be in ac-
cordance with API Specification 5L.
l) Galvanized Pipe: Galvanized pipe ordered under this specification can be coated with zinc inside
and outside by the hot-dip process. The zinc used for the coating shall be any grade of zinc con-
forming to Specification B 6. The weight of zinc coating shall be not less than 1.8 oz/ft [0.55 kg/m]
and not less than 1.6 oz/ft [0.49 kg/m]. The weight of zinc coating shall be determined by a strip-
ping test in accordance with Test Method A 90/A 90M.
m) Identification of Materials: Each length of pipe shall be legibly marked in the following se-
quence by rolling, stamping, or stenciling, showing; manufacturers name, specification number
(year not required), size (NPS and weight class, schedule number, or nominal wall thickness), Type
(F, E, or S), Grade (A or B), test pressure, seamless pipe (if applicable), and nondestructive electric
test (if applicable). For bundled pipes NPS 1 1/2 [DN 40] and smaller is permissible to identify on a
tag securely attached to each bundle.
n) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this section indicates the required dimensions variations, and
chemical elements permitted. Table 1, Chemical requirements, Table 2, Tensile requirements, Table
3, Acceptance limits, Table 4, Marking of seamless pipe. Non-mandatory appendices (Type F, Fur-
nace-Butt-Welded Pipe, Continuous-Welded, Type E, Electric-Resistance-Welded Pipe, Type S,
Wrought Steel Seamless Pipe), Tables X2.1-X2.4, consecutively dimensional and mechanical re-
quirements, Table X3.1-X3.2, basic threading data, Tables X4.1-X4.2, minimum elongation values.
8) SA-105/SA-105M Specification of Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications:
This specification covers forged carbon steel piping components for ambient and higher tem-
perature service in pressure systems. Included are flanges, fittings, valves, and similar parts ordered
either to dimensions specified by the purchaser or to dimensional standards, such as the MSS,
ASME, and API specifications referenced in Section 2. For larger forgings above 10,000 lb [4540 kg]

is according to specification A 266/A 266M. This specification covers some piping components ma-
chined from rolled bar and seamless tubular products. Material and tests are shown below:
A 266/A 266M - Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Pressure Vessel Components;
A 675/A 675M - Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, Mechanical Properties;
A 696 - Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought or Cold-Finished, Special Quality, for Pressure Pip-
ing Components;
A 788 - Specification for Steel Forgings, General Requirements;
A 961 - Specification for Common Requirements for Steel Flanges, Forged Fittings, Valves, and Parts for Pip-
ing Applications;
MSS SP 44 - Standard for Steel Pipe Line Flanges;
ASME B16.5 - Dimensional Standards for Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings;
ASME B16.9 - Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings;
ASME B16.10 - Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Ferrous Valves;
ASME B16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Weld, and Threaded;
ASME B16.34 - Valves-Flanged, Threaded and Welding End;
ASME B16.47 - Large Diameter Steel Flanges;
API-600 - Flanged and Butt-Welding-End Steel Gate Valves;
API-602 - Compact Design Carbon Steel Gate Valves for Refinery Use;
Note: These forgings are furnished to this specification conform to the requirements of Specification
A 961, including any supplementary requirements indicated in the purchase order. The finished
product can be a forging, as defined in the Terminology Section of Specification A 788.
a) Chemical Analysis: Sampling for chemical analysis and methods of analysis can be in accord-
ance with Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751. The heat analysis must include deter-
mination of the content of carbon, manganese, phosphorus, sulfur, silicon, nickel, chromium, molyb-
denum, copper, vanadium, and columbium, etc., and must conform to the chemical requirements
specified in Table 1. Steels to which lead has been added cannot be used.
b) Heat Treatment: Heat treatment, when required must be annealing, normalizing, or normalizing
and tempering or quenching and tempering. However, heat treatment is a mandatory requirement
only for the following piping components:
Flanges above Class 300 according to ASME B16.5;

Flanges of special design where the design pressure at the design temperature exceeds the
pressure-temperature ratings of Class 300, Group 1.1, according to ASME B16.34;
Piping components of Special Class other than flanges which meet both of the following cri-
teria: over NPS 4 and when the working pressure at the operating temperature exceeds the
tabulated values for Special Class 300, Group 1.1, according to ASME B16.34;
c) Inspection and Tests: All tests must be conducted in accordance with Test Methods and Defini-
tions A 370. When hollow cylindrically shaped parts are machined from seamless tubular materials,
strip tests may be used. One percent of the forgings per lot, or ten forgings, whichever is the lesser
number, shall be selected at random, prepared, and tested using the standard Brinell test. The
hardness of all forgings so tested shall be 137 to 187 HB inclusive.

d) Repair by Welding: Repair of defects by the manufacturer is permissible for forgings. Weld re-
pairs can be made by a process that does not produce undesirably high levels of hydrogen in the
welded areas. All forgings repaired by welding shall be postweld heat treated between 1100F
[593C] and the lower for a minimum of 1/2 h/in., [1/2 h/25.4 mm] of maximum section thickness, or
alternatively annealed, normalized and tempered, or quenched and tempered, in accordance with
ASME Section IX with the requirements listed in Table 2.
e) Identification of Materials: When agreed upon by the purchaser, the identification marks as re-
quired in Specification A 961 if the forgings have been quenched and tempered, the letters QT
shall be stamped on the forgings following this specification number. Forgings repaired by welding
shall be marked with the letter W following this specification number. Test reports required for
larger products, the markings may be the manufacturers symbol and this specification number.
f) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this Section indicates consecutively, the required dimensions varia-
tions, and chemical elements permitted. Table 1, Chemical requirements, Table 2, Mechanical re-
quirements, Table 3, Computed minimum values. The supplementary are; S.1 Hardness, S.2 Heat
Treatment, S.3 Marking Small Forgings, S.4 Carbon Equivalent.
9) SA-106/SA-106M Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature

Service:
This specification covers seamless carbon steel pipe for high-temperature service in NPS 1/8 to
NPS 48 [DN 6 to DN 1200] inclusive, in three grades of application (Grades A, B and C) with nomi-
nal wall thickness given in ASME B36.10M, suitable for bending, flanging, and similar forming op-
erations, and for welding. The materials and tests covered by SA-106 are shown below:
A 530/A 530M Specif. for General Requirements for Specialized Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe;
E 309 - Eddy-Current Examination of Steel Tubular Products Using Magnetic Saturation;
E 381 - Method of Macroetch Testing Steel Bars, Billets, Blooms, and Forgings;
ASME/ANSI - B36.10M - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe;
SSPC-SP 6 - Surface Preparation Specification No. 6.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The pipe is manufactured seamless, killed steel, made by one or
more of the following processes; open-hearth, electric-furnace, or basic-oxygen, combined with
separate degassing or refining. For pipe NPS 1 1/2 [DN 40] and under, it is permissible to furnish
hot finished or cold drawn, for pipe NPS 2 [DN 50] and over can be furnished hot finished.
ance with Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751. The analyses, so determined, are con-
forming to the heat analysis requirements for the applicable grade, class, and type of material, sub-
ject to permitted variations. If a range is specified, the requirements of any element in a heat treat-
ment cannot vary above and below the specified range.

c) Inspection and Tests: All tests must be conducted in accordance with Test Methods and Defini-
tions A 370. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector reasonable facilities to be satisfied that the
structural product is being furnished in accordance with this requirements specification. Hot-finished
pipe need not be heat treated. Cold drawn pipe shall be heat treated after the final cold draw pass at
a temperature of 1200F (650C) or higher.
d) Bending and Flattening Tests: For bending and flattening requirements of NPS 2 [DN 50] pipe
and under, a sufficient length may be bent cold through a 90, around a cylindrical mandrel, which
diameter is twelve times the outside diameter of the pipe, without developing cracks. For close coil-
ing, the pipe may be bent cold through a 180, around a cylindrical mandrel, which diameter is eight
times the outside diameter of the pipe, without failure.
Note: For pipe whose diameter exceeds 25 in. [635 mm], where the diameter to wall thickness ratio,
is the outside diameter divided by the nominal wall thickness, is 7.0 or less, the bending test can be
conducted, and test specimens must be bent at room temperature through 180 with the inside di-
ameter of the bend being 1 in. [25 mm] without cracking on the outside portion of the bent portion.
e) Hydrostatic Tests: Where specified in the purchase order, it can be permissible for pipe to be
furnished without the hydrostatic test and without the nondestructive electric test (see SA-53); in this
case, each length shall include the marking of the letters NH, with a stated certification. The hydro-
static test has the capability of finding defects of a size permitting the test fluid to leak through the
tube wall and may be either visually seen or detected by a loss of pressure.
f) Ultrasonic and Eddy Current Inspection: The Ultrasonic testing examinations is capable of de-
tecting the presence and location of significant longitudinally or circumferentially oriented imperfec-
tions. The Eddy Current examination has the capability of detecting significant imperfections, espe-
cially of the short abrupt type. The flux leakage examination is capable of detecting the presence
and location of significant longitudinally or transversely oriented imperfections.
g) Pipe-End Finish: NPS 1 1/2 [DN 40] and smaller; walls are either plain-end square cut, or plain-
end beveled at the option of the manufacturer. NPS 2 [DN 50] and larger; walls through extra strong
weights, are plain-end-beveled. NPS 2 [DN 50] and larger, walls over extra strong weights, are
plain-end square cut. Plain-end beveled pipe has a bevel angle of 30 (+5 or 0), measured from a
line drawn perpendicular to the axis of the pipe with a root face of 1/16 1/32 in. [1.6 0.8 mm].
h) Identification of Materials: As prescribed in Specification A 530/A 530M, the marking shall in-
clude the heat number, and a symbol S if one or more of the supplementary requirements apply.
Length shall be marked in feet and tenths of a foot [meters to two decimal places], or other marking
subject to agreement. For sizes NPS 1 1/2, 1 1/4, 1, and 3/4 [DN 40, 32, 25, and 20], each length
must be marked as prescribed in Specification A 530/A 530M. For sizes less than NPS 3/4 [DN 20],
the required markings must be on the bundle tag or on each length of pipe.
i) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this Section indicates consecutively, the required dimensions varia-
tions, and chemical elements permitted. Table 1, Chemical requirements for Grades A, B and C,
Table 2, Tensile requirements, Table 3, Variations in outside diameter. The supplementary are; S1.
Product Analysis, S2. Transverse Tension Test, S3. Flattening Test, Standard, S4. Flattening Test,

Enhanced, S5. Metal Structure and Etching Test, S6. Carbon Equivalent, S7. Heat Treated Test
Specimens, S8. Internal CleanlinessGovernment Orders, S9. Requirements for Carbon Steel Pipe
for Hydrofluoric Acid Alkylation Service.
10) SA-134 Specif. for Pipe, Steel, Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded (NPS 16 and Over):
This specification covers electric-fusion (arc)-welded straight seam or spiral seam steel pipe NPS 16
and over in diameter, with wall thicknesses up to 3/4 in. (19.0 mm), inclusive. This pipe is applied
for structure pipe, fluid pipe, oil pipe, boiler pipe, gas pipe, hydraulic pipe, etc. The materials and
tests covered by SA-134 are shown below:
A 36/A 36M - Specification for Carbon Structural Steel;
A 283/A 283M - Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates;
A 285/A 285M Specif. for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low-and Intermediate-Tensile Strength;
A 570/A 570M - Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality;
ASME/ANSI B 16.25 - Buttwelding Ends;
ASME/ANSI B 36.10 - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel for from which the pipe is made must conform to Specifi-
cations A 283/A 283M, A 285/A 285M, A 570, or A 36/A 36M or to other ASTM specifications for
equally suitable weldable material, as specified. The weld can be made by automatic means (except
tack welds), and all longitudinal seams, spiral seams, and shop girth seams can be butt-welded. The
product must meet all applicable requirements of Class III Piping including those requirements per-
taining to heat treatment and butt welds.
b) Inspection and Tests: All tests must be conducted in accordance with Test Methods and Defini-
tions A 370. The weld-test specimens for the reduced-section tension test must be taken perpendic-
ularly across the weld and from the end of the pipe or alternatively, from flat test pieces of material,
approximately in the middle of the specimen, straightened cold, and tested at room temperature.
Two reduced-section tension specimens (transverse weld), must show a tensile strength not less
than 100% of the minimum specified tensile strength of the base material used. Bend test should
withstand a 180 bending in a jig, and be only acceptable if no cracks, or other defects exceeding
1/8 in. (3.2 mm) in any direction, be present between the weld and the pipe metal after bending.
Cracks less than 1/4 in. (6.3 mm) in any direction, shall not be considered.
c) Hydrostatic Tests: When specified, each length of pipe can be tested by the manufacturer to a
hydrostatic pressure to produce in the pipe wall, a stress of 60% of the specified minimum yield
point, at room temperature. The pressure can be determined by the following equation:
P = 2St/D
Where:
P = Minimum hydrostatic test pressure, psi - not to exceed 2800 psi (19 MPa);
S = 0.60 times the minimum specified yield point of the steel used, psi (MPa);

T = Specified wall thickness, in. (mm);

D = Specified outside diameter, in. (mm).
Note: Test pressure must be held for not less than 5s, or for a longer time as agreed upon between
the purchaser and the manufacturer . When hydrostatic test is omitted, the certificate can include the
letters NH.
d) Identification of Materials: Each section of pipe must be marked with the manufacturers distin-
guishing marking, this specification number and the pipe grade. The marking need not include the
year date of the pipe or plate specification.
11) SA-135 Specification for Electric-Resistance Welded Steel Pipe:
This specification covers two grades of electric resistance-welded steel pipe in NPS 2 to NPS 30 in-
clusive. This pipe specification is intended for conveying gas, vapor, water or other liquid, but only
Grade A is adapted for flanging and bending. The pipe may be furnished either non-expanded or
cold expanded. When pipe is cold expanded, the amount of expansion cannot exceed 1.5% of the
outside diameter pipe size. The materials and tests covered by SA-135 are shown below:
A 865 - Specification for Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black and Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded or Seam-
less, for Use in Steel Pipe Joints;
E 6 - Terminology Relating to Methods of Mechanical Testing;
E 273 - Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Longitudinal Welded Pipe and Tubing;
ASME/ANSI - B36.10 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe.
Note: Pipes with nominal wall thickness up to 0.500 in. (12.70 mm), and NPS 3/4 to NPS 5 inclu-
sive, with nominal wall thickness 0.083 in. (2.11 mm) to 0.134 in. (3.40 mm), depending on size.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel is made by either or both of the following processes:
basic-oxygen or electric-furnace, from flat rolled steel in individual lengths, or in continuous length,
by electric-resistance or electric-induction welding without the addition of extraneous materials. The
Grade B electric-resistance welded pipe must be heat-treated after welding, to a minimum tempera-
ture of 1000 F (540 C), in such a manner that no untempered martensite remains.
ance with Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751. Samples for chemical analysis, except
for spectro-chemical analysis, are taken in accordance with Practice E 59. The number of samples
shall be determined as follows:

Under NPS 6: 2 from each lot of 400 pipes or a fraction;

NPS 6 to 20: 2 from each lot of 200 pipes or a fraction;
NPS over 20 to 30: 2 from each lot of 100 pipes or a fraction.
c) Inspection and Tests: The test specimen taken across the weld must show a tensile strength
not less than the minimum tensile strength specified for the grade of pipe ordered. The yield
strength shall be determined by the offset method utilizing 0.2% of the gage length or by the total
extension under load method using 0.5% of the gage length. This test will not be required for pipe
under NPS 8.
d) Bending and Flattening Tests: For bending requirements a test specimen at least 4 in. [100
mm] in length. The flattening test is performed between the parallel plates in three steps, with the
weld located either 0 or 90 from the line of direction of force, whichever is applicable. The first step
is a test for ductility of the weld, and no cracks or breaks can appear inside or outside the surfaces,
until the distance between the plates is less than two thirds of the pipe diameter. The second step is
a test for the ductility of the tube, and no cracks or breaks can appear inside or outside the surfaces
of the welded tube. The third step is for welding soundness, when the flattening test must continue
until the specimen breaks or the opposite walls of the pipe meet each other.
Note: Evidence of laminated or unsound material or of incomplete weld that is revealed during the
entire flattening test, can be causes for rejection.
e) Hydrostatic Tests: When specified, each length of pipe can be tested by the manufacturer to a
hydrostatic pressure that will produce in the pipe wall a stress of 60% of the specified minimum yield
point, at room temperature. The pressure can be determined by the following equation:
P = 2St/D
Where:
P = Minimum hydrostatic test pressure, psi - not to exceed 2500 psi (17.2 MPa);
S = Allowable fiber stress 18,000 psi (124 MPa) for Grade A and 21,000 psi (144 MPa) for Grade B.
T = Specified wall thickness, in. (mm);
D = Specified outside diameter, in. (mm).
Note: Test pressure can be held for not less than 5s or for a longer time, as agreed upon between
the purchaser and the manufacturer . When hydrostatic test is omitted, the certificate can include the
letters NH. Pipe furnished to Schedule 10 must be normally shipped with a mill coating of pro-
cessing oil or a special coating.
Obs.: As an alternate to the hydrostatic test, each pipe can be tested with a nondestructive electric
test in accordance with Practice E 213, Practice E 273, or Practice E 309, for Schedule 10 pipe in
sizes NPS 3/4 to NPS 5, inclusive, and when accepted by the purchaser. The intent of this test is to
reject pipe containing defects.

f) Ultrasonic and Eddy Current Inspection: The Ultrasonic testing examinations is capable of de-
tecting the presence and location of significant longitudinally or circumferentially oriented imperfec-
tions. The Eddy Current examination has the capability of detecting significant imperfections, espe-
cially of the short abrupt type. The flux leakage examination is capable of detecting the presence
and location of significant longitudinally or transversely oriented imperfections.
g) Pipe-End Finish: Plain end pipe for welding can be beveled on the outside to an angle of 30
with a tolerance of + 5 and 0 and with a width of flat at the end of the pipe of 1/16 +/ 1/32 in.
(1.6 +/ 0.8 mm). When material is ordered beveled to any other than a 30 angle, it should be un-
derstood that the angle is to be measured from a line drawn perpendicular to the axis of the pipe.
This means that a greater amount of material is removed with a 60 angle than with a 30 angle.
Plain end pipe intended for Dresser or Dayton type joints, sizes NPS 10 and smaller, cannot be
more than 1/32 in. (0.8 mm) smaller than the outside diameter, for a distance of 8 in. (203 mm) from
the ends of the pipe, to permit the passing of a ring gage with a bore 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) larger than
the pipe outside diameter. Sizes larger than NPS 10 cannot be more than 1/32 in. (0.8 mm) smaller
than the nominal outside diameter, for a distance of 8 in. (203 mm) from the end of the pipe, to per-
mit the passing of a ring gage with a bore 3/32 in. (2.4 mm) larger than the pipe outside diameter.
Note: A complete description of the American National Standard Pipe Threads applicable to pipe,
valves, and fittings is contained in the American National Standard for Pipe Threads (ANSI B1.20.1);
also Screw-Thread Standards for Federal Services.
h) Couplings: For sizes NPS 2 and smaller, it is commercial practice to furnish straight-tapped cou-
plings for standard-weight (Schedule 40) pipe and taper-tapped couplings for extra-strong (Sched-
ule 80) and double extra-strong pipe. If taper-tapped couplings are required for sizes NPS 2 and
smaller on standard weight (Schedule 40) pipe, in accordance with API Specification 5L, thread
lengths to be in accordance with the American National Standard for Pipe Threads (ANSI B1.20.1).
i) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this section indicates consecutively, the required dimensions varia-
tions, and chemical elements permitted. Table 1, Tensile requirements, Table 2, Chemical require-
ments. Appendix (Nonmandatory), Table X1.1, Dimensions, weights and test pressures, Table X1.2,
Minimum permissible wall thickness.
12) SA-178/SA-178M Specification for Electric-Resistance Welded Carbon Steel and

Carbon-Manganese Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes:
This specification covers minimum-wall-thickness, electric-resistance-welded tubes made of carbon

steel and carbon-manganese steel. These tubes are intended for use as boiler tubes, boiler flues,
superheater flues, and safe ends. The tubing sizes and thicknesses usually furnished to this specifi-
cation are 1/2 to 5 in. [12.7 to 127 mm] in outside diameter and 0.035 to 0.320 in. [0.9 to 9.1 mm], in
minimum wall thickness. The materials and tests covered by SA-178 are shown below:
A 226/A 226M - Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes for
High-Pressure Service;
A 450/A 450M Specif. for General Requirements for Carbon, Ferritic Alloy, and Austenitic Alloy Steel Tubes;

A 520 - Specification for Supplementary Requirements for Seamless and Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon
Steel Tubular Products for High-Temperature Service and ISO Recommendations for Boiler Construction;
E 273 - Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Longitudinal Welded Pipe and Tubing.
Note: When these products are to be used in applications conforming to ISO Recommendations for
Boiler Construction, the requirements of Specification A 520 shall supplement and supersede the
requirements of this specification.
a) Materials and Manufacture: These tubes are made by electric-resistance welding, Grades A, B
and C, and must conform to the applicable requirements of the current edition of Specification A
450/A 450M. Grade A is low-carbon steel (0.06 0.018), Grade B is medium-carbon steel (0.35
max.) and Grade C is a carbon-manganese steel (C = 0.27 max., Mn = 1.00 1.50).
ance with Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751. The steel must conform to the require-
ments as to chemical composition prescribed specifically for Grades A, B and C.
c) Inspection and Tests: The test specimen taken across the weld must show a tensile strength
not less than the minimum tensile strength specified for the grade of pipe ordered. For Grades C
and D, one tension test can be made on specimens from each of two tubes of each lot. When in-
serted in the boiler, tubes must withstand expanding and beading without showing cracks or flaws,
or opening at the weld. Superheater tubes must withstand all forging, welding, and bending opera-
tions, without developing defects.
d) Bending and Flattening Tests: For all grades, one bending and flattening test can be made on
specimens from each of two tubes of each lot, as specified for SA-134/SA-134M. When required by
the purchaser, flattening and crushing tests must be made on sections of tube 2 1/2 in. [63 mm] in
length which must stand crushing longitudinally without cracking, splitting, or opening at the weld.
One reverse flattening test can be made on each 1500 ft [450 m] of finished tubing.
e) Hydrostatic Tests: The purchaser may specify which test is to be used. The common hydrostatic
test is; each length of pipe can be tested by the manufacturer to a hydrostatic pressure that will pro-
duce in the pipe wall a stress of 60% of the specified minimum yield point, at room temperature.
f) Identification of Materials: The letters ERW (Electric-Resistance Welded) must be legibly sten-
ciled on each tube, or marked on a tag attached to the bundle or box in which the tubes are
shipped. The marking need not include the year date of the pipe or plate specification.
g) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this section indicates consecutively, the required dimensions varia-
tions, and chemical elements permitted; Table 1, Chemical requirements, Table 2, Tensile require-
ments, Table 3, Minimum Elongation Values.
13) SA-179/SA-179M Specification for Seamless Cold-Drawn, Low-Carbon Steel, Heat

Exchanger and Condenser Tubes:

This specification covers minimum wall thickness, seamless cold-drawn low-carbon steel tubes for
tubular heat exchangers, condensers, and similar heat transfer apparatus. The tubing sizes usually
furnished to this specification are 1/8 to 3 in. [3.2 to 76.2 mm], inclusive, in outside diameter.
a) Materials and Manufacture: Tubes are made by the seamless process, cold drawn and must be
heat treated after the final cold draw pass at a temperature of 1200F [650C] or higher, according
to A 450/A 450M Specification for Carbon, Ferritic Alloy, and Austenitic Alloy Steel Tubes.
ance with Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751. The steel shall conform to the following
requirements as to chemical composition; Carbon, % 0.06-0.18; Manganese, % 0.27-0.63; Phos-
phorus, max, % 0.035; Sulfur, max, % 0.035.
c) Inspection and Tests: The test specimen must show a tensile strength not less than the mini-
mum tensile strength. The tube shall have a hardness number not exceeding 72 HRB. When final
heat treatment is in a batch-type furnace, a lot shall include only those tubes of the same size, and
the same heat treated in the same furnace charge.
Note: The following tensile properties may be assumed. Tensile strength, min, ksi [MPa] 47 [325];
Yield strength, min, ksi [MPa] 26 [180]; Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, 35 %.
d) Bending and Flattening Tests: One flattening test can be made on specimens from each of two
tubes of each lot, and one flaring test can be made on specimens from each lot accordingly.
test is; each length of pipe shall be tested by the manufacturer to a hydrostatic pressure that will
produce in the pipe wall a stress of 60% of the specified minimum yield point, at room temperature.
14) SA-181/SA-181M Specif. for Carbon Steel Forgings, for General-Purpose Piping:
This specification covers nonstandard forged fittings, valve components, and parts for general ser-
vice. Forgings made to this specification are limited to a maximum weight of 10,000 lb [4540 kg].
Larger forgings may be ordered to Specification A 266/A 266M. Two classes of material are cov-
ered, designated as Classes 60 and 70, respectively, and are classified in accordance with their
mechanical properties. The materials and tests covered by SA-181 are:
A 266/A 266M - Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Pressure Vessel Components;
A 788/A 788M - Specification for Steel Forgings, General Requirements;
A 961/A 961M - Specification for Common Requirements for Steel Flanges, Forged Fittings, Valves, and Parts
for Piping Applications.
a) Materials and Manufacture: Except for flanges of all types, hollow, cylindrically shaped parts
may be machined from hot-rolled or forged bar, provided that the axial length of the part is approxi-
mately parallel to the metal flow lines of the stock. Other parts, excluding flanges of all types, up to
and including NPS 4 may be machined from hot-rolled or forged bar. Elbows, return bends, tees,
and header tees shall not be machined directly from bar stocks.

Note: The finished product can be a forging, as defined in the Terminology section of Specification
A 788/A 788M.
b) Chemical Analysis: An analysis of each heat can be made by the manufacturer to determine the
percentages of the elements specified.
c) Heat Treatment: Heat treatment is neither required nor prohibited, but when applied, heat treat-
ment consists of tempering, annealing, normalizing, or normalizing and tempering. Forgings must be
protected against sudden or too rapid cooling from the rolling or forging while passing through the
critical range.
d) Inspection and Tests: Material must conform to the requirements as to tensile properties speci-
fied. Welding shall be accomplished with a weld procedure designed to produce low hydrogen in the
weldment. Short-circuit gas metal arc welding is permissible only with the approval of the purchaser.
e) Identification of Materials: Consist of the manufacturers symbol or name, designation of ser-

vice rating, Specification number, class, and size must be legibly forged or stamped on each forging,
and in such a position as not to injure the usefulness of the forgings.
f) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this section indicates consecutively, the required dimensions varia-
tions, and chemical elements permitted; Table 1, Chemical requirements, Class 60 & 70, Table 2,
Tensile requirements, Class 60 & 70.
15) SA-182/SA-182M Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe
Flanges, Forged Fittings, Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service:
This specification covers forged low alloy and stainless steel piping components for use in pressure
systems, such as flanges, fittings, valves, and similar parts to specified dimensions or to dimension-
al standards. Products made to this specification are limited to a maximum weight of 10,000 lb
[4,540 kg]. For larger products and other applications, refer to Specifications A 336/A 336M and A
965/A 965M for the similar ferritic and austenitic grades, respectively.
Several grades of low alloy steels and ferritic, martensitic, austenitic, and ferritic-austenitic stainless
steels are included in this specification, for selection upon design and service requirements. Sup-
plementary requirements are provided for use when additional testing or inspection is desired. The
materials and tests covered by SA-182 are:
A 234 /A 234M - Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
High Temperature Service;
A 262 - Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular Attack in Austenitic Stainless Steels;
A 275/A 275M - Test Method for Magnetic Particle Examination of Steel Forgings;
A 336/A 336M - Specification for Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure and High-Temperature Parts;
A 403 /A 403M - Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings;
A 479/A 479M Specif. for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure Vessels;
A 484/A 484M -Specification for General Requirements for Stainless Steel Bars, Billets, and Forgings;
A 739 Specif. for Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought, for Elevated Temperature or Pressure-Containing Parts;
A 763 - Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular Attack in Ferritic Stainless Steels;


A 961/A 961M - Specification for Common Requirements for Steel Flanges, Forged Fittings, Valves, and Parts
for Piping Applications;
A 965/A 965M - Specification for Steel Forgings, Austenitic, for Pressure and High Temperature Parts
E 112 - Text Methods for Determining Average Grain Size;
E 165 - Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination;
E 340 - Test Method for Macro-etching Metals and Alloys;
ASME - Section IX Welding Qualifications:

SFA-5.4 Spec. for Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Steel Covered Welding Electrodes;
SFA-5.5 - Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes;
SFA-5.9 - Specification for Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Steel Welding Rods and
Bare Electrodes;
SFA-5.11 - Specification for Nickel and Nickel-Alloy Covered Welding Electrodes;
Note: For bars and machined products, refer to Specifications A 479/A 479M and A 739.
a) Materials and Manufacture: Low-alloy ferritic steels are made by the open-hearth, electric-
furnace, or basic-oxygen process. Stainless steels are made by electric-furnace (degassing and re-
fining processes), vacuum furnace or electroslag remelting. Grade FXM-27Cb may be produced by
electron-beam melting. The steel is forged as specified for shape and size. Flanges of any type may
be fabricated by forging or rolled bars, for small cylindrically shaped parts, within the limits defined
by Specification A 234/A 234M for low alloy steels and martensitic stainless steel s. The Specifica-
tion A 403/A 403M, is the standard method for austenitic and ferritic-austenitic stainless steels.
Note: Elbows, return bends, tees, and header tees cannot be machined directly from bar stocks.
Forged or rolled austenitic stainless bars, and the parts machined without heat treatment must be
furnished to the annealing requirements of Specification A 479/A 479M. Finished products are de-
fined in the Terminology section of Specification A 788.
b) Chemical Analysis: Must be in accordance with Specification A 961/A 961M conform to the
chemical composition prescribed in Table 2. Grades to which lead, selenium, or other elements
added for the purpose of free machining, cannot be used. Steel grades cannot contain unspecified
elements, other than nitrogen in stainless steels. The steel grade is defined as an alloy described
individually, and identified by its own UNS designation and identification symbol.
c) Inspection and Tests: Test specimens are obtained from production forgings, or from separately
forged test blanks used to make the finished product, and cannot be removed until all heat treat-
ment is complete. For annealed low alloy steels, ferritic stainless steels, and martensitic stainless
steels, and also for austenitic and ferritic-austenitic stainless steels, the test specimen may be taken
from any convenient location.
Hardness testing and impact test specimens, in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A
370 to ensure that the forgings are within the hardness limits given for each grade in Table 3. Impact
test specimens must be Charpy V-notch Type, and meet a minimum energy absorption value of 40
ft-lbf [54 J] average of three specimens. One specimen may be below 40 ft-lbf [54 J], and must meet
a minimum value of 35 ft-lbf [48 J]. The impact test temperature shall be 0F [18C].

d) Grain Size for Austenitic Grades: All H grades and grade F 63 are tested for average grain size
by Test Methods E 112. Grades F 304H, F 309H, F 310H, and F 316H have a grain size of ASTM
No. 6 or coarser. Grades F 321H, F 347H, and F 348H have a grain size of ASTM No. 7 or coarser.
Grade F 63 has a grain size of ASTM No. 3 or finer. Corrosion testing is not required.
e) Repair by Welding: Welding procedure and welders must be qualified in accordance with ASME
Section IX. The electrodes must be in accordance with ASME Specifications SFA-5.4, SFA-5.5,
SFA-5.9, or SFA-5.11. Submerged arc process with neutral flux, gas metal-arc process, gas tung-
sten-arc process, and gas shielded processes using flux-core consumables, may be used. Defects
shall be completely removed prior to welding by chipping or grinding and verified by magnetic-
particle inspection (Test Method A 275/A 275M) for low alloy steels and ferritic, martensitic, or
ferritic-austenitic stainless steels, or by liquid-penetrant inspection (Test Method E 165) for all
grades.
Repair by welding cannot exceed 10% of the surface area of the forging, nor 331/3% of the wall
thickness of the finished forging or 3/8 in. [9.5 mm], whichever is less, without prior approval of the
purchaser. Preheat interpass temperature, and postweld heat treatment requirements are given in
Table 4. Austenitic stainless steel forgings may be repair welded without the post-weld heat treat-
ment, according to purchaser approval. No weld repairs are permitted for F 6a Classes 3 and 4.
f) Identification of Materials: Quenched and tempered low alloy or martensitic stainless forgings
shall be stamped with the letters QT, and forgings repaired by welding shall be marked with the let-
ter W after the specification designation. When repair-welded austenitic stainless steel forgings
were not postweld heat treated in accordance with Table 4, the letters WNS can be marked, ac-
cording to Specification A 961 /A 961M. Classes or grade parts may be marked with more than one
class or grade designation, such as F 304/F 304H, F 304/F 304L.
g) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this section indicates consecutively, the required variations, and
chemical elements permitted. Table 1, Heat-treating requirements, Table 2, Chemical requirements,
Table 3, Tensile and Hardness requirements, Table 4 Repair welding requirements. Supplementary
requirements: S1. Macroetch Test, S2. Heat Treatment Details, S3. Material for Optimum Re-
sistance to Stress-Corrosion Cracking, S4. Corrosion Tests, S6. Hardness Test, S7. Alternate Heat
Treatment (Grades F 91 and F 92), S8. Heat Treatment of Austenitic Forgings, S9. Grain Size for
Austenitic Grades, S10. Stabilization Treatment, S11. Grain Size Requirements for Non -H-Grade
Austenitic Steels Used Above 1000F [540C]. The grades designations are listed below:
Low Alloy Steels: F 1, F 2, F 5, F 5a, F 9, F 10, F 91, F 92, F 122, F 911, F 11, F 12, F 21,
F 3V, F 3VCb, F 22 Classes 1 and 3, F 22V, F 23, F 24, FR, F36 Class 1, and F36 Class 2.
Martensitic Stainless Steels: F 6A Class 1, F 6A Class 2, F 6A Class 3, F 6A Class 4, F
6B, and F 6NM.
Ferritic Stainless Steels: F XM-27Cb, F 429, and F 430.
Austenitic Stainless Steels: F 304, F 304H, F 304L, F 304N, F 304LN, F 309H, F 310 F,
310H, F 310MoLN, F 316 F, 316H, F 316L, F 316N, F 316LN, F 316Ti, F 317, F 317L, F
347, F 347H, F 348, F 348H, F 321, F 321H, F XM-11, F XM-19, F 20, F 44, F 45, F 46, F
47, F 48, F 49, F 56, F 58, F 62, F 63, F 64, and F 904L.

Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless Steels: F50, F51, F52, F53, F54, F55, F57, F59, F60, F61,
and F65.
16) SA-192/SA-192M Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Boiler Tubes for High-
Pressure Service:
This specification covers minimum-wall thickness, seamless carbon steel boiler and superheater
tubes for high-pressure service. The tubing sizes and thicknesses usually furnished to this specifica-
tion are 1/2 in. to 7 in. [12.7 to 177.8 mm] outside diameter and 0.085 to 1.000 in. [2.2 to 25.4 mm],
inclusive, in minimum wall thickness. Other dimensions may be furnished, since such tubes comply
with all requirements of this specification. The materials and tests covered by SA-192 are:
A 520 Spec. for Supplementary Requirements for Seamless and Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel
Tubular Products for High-Temperature Service Conforming to ISO Recommendations for Boiler Construction.
a) Materials and Manufacture: These tubes are made by the seamless process, hot-finished or
cold-finished. Hot-finished tubes need not be heat treated. Cold-finished tubes must be heat treated
after the final cold-finished at a temperature of 1200F [650C] or higher.
ance with Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751. The steel shall conform to the following
requirements as to chemical composition; Carbon, % 0.06-0.18; Manganese, % 0.27-0.63; Phos-
phorus, max, % 0.035; Sulfur, max, % 0.035. Addition of any other element is not permitted.
c) Inspection and Tests: The test specimen must show a tensile strength not less than the mini-
mum tensile strength. Brinell or Rockwell hardness tests are made on specimens from two tubes
from each lot. Brinell Hardness (Tubes 0.200 in. [5.1 mm] and over in wall thickness) - 137 HB,
Rockwell B Number (Tubes less than 0.200 in. [5.1 mm] in wall thickness - 77 HRB.
Note: The following tensile properties may be assumed; Tensile strength, min, ksi [MPa] 47 [325];
Yield strength, min, ksi [MPa] 26 [180]; Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min. 35%.
d) Bending and Flattening Tests: One flattening test can be made on specimens from each of two
tubes of each lot, and one flaring test must be made on specimens from each lot accordingly.
duce in the pipe wall a stress of 60% of the specified minimum yield point, at room temperature.
17) SA-193/SA-193M Specif. for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for
High-Temperature or High-Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications:
This specification covers alloy and stainless steel bolting material for pressure vessels, valves,
flanges, and fittings for high temperature or high pressure service, or other special purpose applic a-
tions. The term bolting material covers bars, bolts, screws, studs, stud bolts, and wire. Bars and wire
must be hot-wrought.

Note: For grades of alloy-steel bolting material suitable for use at the lower range of high tempera-
ture applications, reference should be made to Specification A 354. Other alloy-steel bolting material
suitable for use in low temperature applications, should be made to Specification A 320/A 320M.
The material may be further processed by centerless grinding or by cold drawing. Austenitic stain-
less steel may be carbide solution treated or carbide solution treated and strain-hardened, which
must be according to Appendix X1. Several grades are covered, including ferritic steels and austen-
itic stainless steels designated B5, B8, and so forth. Selection depends upon design, service condi-
tions, mechanical properties, and high temperature characteristics. The materials and tests covered
by SA-193 are:
A 153/A 153M - Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware;
A 194/A 194M - Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature
Service;
A 320/A 320M Specif. for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service;
A 354 - Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded
Fasteners;
A 962/A 962M - Specification for Common Requirements for Steel Fasteners or Fastener Materials, or Both,
Intended for Use at Any Temperature from Cryogenic to the Creep Range;
B 695 - Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel;
B 696 - Specification for Coatings of Cadmium Mechanically Deposited;
B 766 - Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Cadmium;
E18 - Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness of Metallic Materials;
E 21 - Test Methods for Elevated Temperature Tension Tests of Metallic Materials;
E 139 - Test Methods for Conducting Creep, Creep-Rupture, and Stress-Rupture Tests of Metallic Materials;
E 150 - Recommended Practice for Conducting Creep and Creep-Rupture Tension Tests of Metallic Materials
Under Conditions of Rapid Heating and Short Times;
E 151 - Recommended Practice for Tension Tests of Metallic Materials at Elevated Temperatures With Rapid
Heating and Conventional or Rapid Strain Rates;
E 292 - Test Methods for Conducting Time-for-Rupture Notch Tension Tests of Materials;
E 328 - Test Methods for Stress Relaxation for Materials and Structures;
E 566 - Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Sorting of Ferrous Metals;
E 709 - Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination;
E 606 - Practice for Strain-Controlled Fatigue Testing;
F 1940 - Test Method for Process Control to Prevent Hydrogen Embrittlement in Plated or Coated Fasteners;
F 1941 Specif. for Electrodeposited Coatings on Threaded Fasteners (Unified Screw Threads - UN/UNR);
ASME/ANSI - B1.1 Screw Threads;
ASME/ANSI - B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws;
ASME/ANSI - B18.2.3.1M Metric Hex Cap Screws;
ASME/ANSI - B18.3 Hexagon Socket and Spline Socket Screws;
ASME/ANSI - B18.3.1M Metric Socket Head Cap Screws.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel is produced by any of the following processes: open-
hearth, basic-oxygen, electric-furnace, or vacuum-induction melting (VIM), and steel may be vacu-
um-treated prior to or during pouring of the ingot or strand casting, quality according to Specification
A 962/A 962M requirements.

b) Chemical Analysis: Each alloy steel must conform to the chemical composition requirements
prescribed in Table 1, and cannot contain an unspecified element of another grade.
c) Heat Treatment: Heat-treatment condition, normalized and tempered, or quenched and tem-
pered, for ferritic materials. Carbide solution treated (Class 1), carbide solution treated after finishing
(Class 1A), and carbide solution treated and strain-hardened (Classes 2, 2B and 2C) for austenitic
stainless steels, carbide solution-treated nitrogen-bearing stainless steels for Classes 1B and 1C,
carbide solution treated by cooling rapidly from the rolling temperature for Class 1D. The minimum
stress-relief temperature shall be 100F [55C] below the tempering temperature.
Both B6 and B6X materials must heat-treated at the tempering temperature for a minimum time of 1
h. B 6X material may be furnished in the as rolled-and-tempered condition and cold working is per-
mitted with the hardness limitation (26 HRC maximum). All fasteners, including austenitic stainless
steels, must be heated from the ambient temperature until the chromium carbide go into solution
and then, cooled at a rate sufficient to prevent the precipitation of the carbide.
Both B7 and B7M bolting material can be heat treated by quenching in a liquid medium and temper-
ing. For B7M bolting, the final heat treatment, may be the tempering operation conducted at 1150F
[620C] minimum, after all machining, threading and forming operations. Material Grade B16 must
be heated to a temperature range from 1700 to 1750F [925 to 955C] and oil quenched. Coatings
are prohibited unless specified by the purchaser, according to Appendix X2.
Note: Alternatively, stainless strain hardened headed fasteners (Class 2, 2B, and 2C) can be tested
full size after strain hardening to determine tensile strength and yield strength and shall conform to
the requirements prescribed in Table 2.
d) Inspection and Tests: The tension test specimen must conform to the requirements prescribed
in Table 2 at room temperature after heat treatment. Headed fasteners must be wedge tested full
size and must conform to the tensile strength. The minimum full size breaking strength (lbf) for indi-
vidual sizes can be as follows:
Ts = UTS x As = As = 0.785 [D (0.974/n)] =
Where: Where:
Ts = Wedge tensile strength; D = Nominal thread size;

UTS = Tensile strength; n = Number of threads per inch.
As = Stress area, square inches, calculated as follows:
The maximum hardness of the Grade B7M grade must be 235 HB or 99 HRB and the minimum
hardness not less than 200 HB or 93 HRB, by Brinell or Rockwell B methods. Hardness testing must
be performed in accordance with either Specification A 962/A 962M or with Test Methods F 606.
The use of electromagnetic testing for hardness as an alternative to 100% indentation hardness
testing is permissible. Electromagnetically hardness must be in accordance with Practice E 566.
Surface preparation for indentation hardness testing must be in accordance with Method E 18.

Bolt heads can be in accordance with the dimensions of ANSI B18.2.1 or ANSI B18.2.3.1M. Body
diameters and head fillet radius for Heavy Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Socket head fasteners must
be in accordance with ANSI B18.3 or ANSI B18.3.1M. Socket head fasteners must be in accordance
with ANSI B18.3 or ANSI B18.3.1M. For studs, bolts, screws, and so forth, one tension test is made
for each diameter involved in the lot, which consists of the following:
Diameter, in. [mm] Lot Size
1 1/8 [30] and under 1500 lb [780 kg] or a fraction;

Over 1 1/8 [30] to 1 3/4 [42], incl. 4500 lb [2000 kg] or a fraction;
Over 1 3/4 [42] to 2 1/2 [64], incl. 6000 lb [2700 kg] or a fraction;
Over 2 1/2 [64] 100 pieces or a fraction.
Note: Tension tests are not required for bolts, screws, studs, or stud bolts fabricated from heat-trea-
ated bars furnished in accordance with this requirements. Bolts, studs, and stud bolts furnished with
nuts, must conform to Specification A 194/A 194M.
e) Identification of Materials: Marking symbol must be applied on one end of the studs, diameters
3/8 in. [10 mm], and to the heads of bolts 1/4 in. [6 mm], according to Table 4 and Table 5. Grade
B7M must have a line under the marking symbol to distinguish it from B7M. Tags and boxes must
carry the material identification and the manufacturers symbol or name.
Type Grade Chemical Composition

Ferritic Steels B5 5% Chromium
B6 - B6X 12% Chromium
Ferritic Steels B7 - B7M Chromium-Molybdenum
B16 Chromium-Molybdenum-Vanadium
Austenitic Steels B8, B8A S30400 (304)
Classes 1, 1A, 1D and 2 B8C, B8CA S34700 (347)
B8M, B8MA, B8M2, B8M3 S31600 (316)
B8P, B8PA S30500
Austenitic Steels B8N, B8NA S30451 (304N)
Classes 1A, 1B, 1D and 2 B8MN, B8MNA S31651 (316N)
B8MLCuN, B8MLCuNA S31254
Austenitic Steels B8T, B8TA S32100 (321)
Classes 1, 1A and 2
Austenitic Steels B8R, B8RA S20910
Classes 1C and 1D B8S, B8SA S21800
Austenitic Steels B8LN, B8LNA S30453
Classes 1, 1A and 1D B8MLN, B8MLNA S31653
f) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this Section indicates the required variations, and chemical ele-
ments permitted. Table 1, Chemical requirements, Table 2 and Table 3, Mechanical requirements
(inches & metric), Table 4, Marking of Ferritic Steels, Table 5, Marking of Austenitic Steels.

g) Supplementary Requirements & Appendices: S1. High-Temperature Tests in accordance with

Practice E 21, and Practices E 139, E 292, E 150, and E 151), S2. Charpy Impact Tests, S3. 100%
Hardness Testing of Grade B7M, S4. Hardness Testing of Grade B16, S5. Product Marking, S6.
Stress Relieving, S7. Magnetic Particle Inspection, S8. Stress-Relaxation Testing, S9. Grain Size
Requirements for Non H Grade Austenitic Steels Used Above 1000F, S10. Hardness Testing of
Class 2 Bolting Materials for ASME Applications, S11. Thread Forming, S12. Stress Rupture Testing
of Grade B16, S13. Coatings on Bolting Materials. Appendices: X1. Strain Hardening of Austenitic
Steels, X2. Coatings and Application Limits.
18) SA-194/SA-194M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for High-Pressure or
High-Temperature Service, or Both:
This specification covers a variety of carbon, alloy, and martensitic stainless steel nuts in the size
range 1/4 through 4 in. and metric M6 through M100 nominal. It also covers austenitic stainless
steel nuts in the size range 1/4 in. and M6 nominal and above. These nuts are intended for high-
pressure or high-temperature service, or both. The materials and tests covered by SA-194 are:
A 153/A 153M - Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware;
A 276 - Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes;
A 320/A 320M Specif. for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service;
B 696 - Specification for Coatings of Cadmium Mechanically Deposited;
B 766 - Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Cadmium;
F 1940 - Test Method for Process Control Verification to Prevent Hydrogen Embrittlement in Plated or Coated
Fasteners;
F 1941 - Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings on Threaded Fasteners (Unified Inch Screw Threads -
UN/UNR).
American National Standards:

B 1.1 - Unified Screw Threads;
B 1.2 - Gages and Gaging for Unified Inch Screw Threads;
B 1.13M - Metric Screw Threads;
B 18.2.2 - Square and Hex Nuts;
B 18.2.4.6M - Metric Heavy Hex Nuts.
Note: Bars, from which the nuts are made, can be hot-wrought and further processed by centerless
grinding or by cold drawing. Austenitic stainless steel may be solution annealed or annealed and
strain-hardened. Dimensional geometry of the nuts as described in ANSI B 18.2.2 or B 18.2.4.6M.
a) Materials and Manufacture: Stainless steels of Grade 6 and 8 nuts are made by one of the fol-
lowing processes: Electric-furnace (degassing and refining optional), Vacuum-induction furnace, or
either of the above followed by electroslag remelting, or consumable-arc remelting. Grades 1 and 2
nuts may be hot, or cold-forged, or machined from colddrawn bars, must be stress-relief annealed at
a temperature of at least 1000F [538C]. Nuts made by hot-forging, machined from hot-forged or
hot-rolled bars need not be stress-relief annealed.

Grades 2H, 2HM, 3, 4, 6, 6F, 7, 7M, and 16 nuts are hot or cold-forged or machined from hot-rolled,
or cold-drawn bars. Grades 8, 8C, 8M, 8T, 8F, 8P, 8N, 8MN, 8R, 8S, 8LN, 8MLN, 8MLCuN, and 9C
nuts are hot or cold forged, or machined from hot-forged, hot-rolled or cold-drawn bars.
Grades 8A, 8CA, 8MA, 8TA, 8FA, 8PA, 8NA, 8MNA, 8RA, 8SA, 8LNA, 8MLNA, 8MLCuNA, and
9CA nuts are hot, cold-forged or machined from hot-forged, hot-rolled, or cold-drawn bars, and sub-
sequently have carbide-solution heat-treated followed by cooling at a rate sufficient to prevent re-
precipitation of the carbides.
Note: Austenitic Grades, all grades with a prefix of 8 or 9. Ferritic Grades are, 1, 2, 2H, 2HM, 3,
4, 6, 6F, 7, 7M, and 16, which must conform to the requirements of Specification A 962/A 962M.
c) Heat Treatment: Grades 2H, 2HM, 3, 4, 6, 6F, 7, 7M, and 16 can be heat treated to meet the re-
quired mechanical properties, quenched in a suitable medium, and then tempered at a temperature
not less than the following:
Grade Temperature, F [C]

2H 850 [455]
2HM 1150 [620]
3 1050 [565]
4 1100 [595]
6 and 6F 1100 [595]
7 1100 [595]
7M 1150 [620]
16 1200 [650]
d) Inspection and Tests: All nuts must be capable of withstanding the proof loads specified in Ta-
ble 3 and Table 4. Nuts that would require a proof load in excess of 160 000 lb/f or 705 kN may be
furnished on the basis of minimum hardness requirements, in accordance with Cone Proof Load in-
dicated in specification A 962/A 962M. Grades 2HM and 7M must be tested by Brinell or Rockwell
methods to ensure product conformance.
Nuts in the size range 1/4 to 1 1/2 in. inclusive and M6 to M36 inclusive must be proof load tested.
Grade 8 nuts and larger size ranges are not subject to this test. Nuts manufactured to dimensions
and configurations other than those covered by Specification A 962 /A 962M, ANSI B 1.1, ANSI B
1.13M, ANSI B 18.2.2, and ANSI B 18.2.4.6M are not subject to the Cone Proof Load test.
e) Dimensions: Nuts are hexagonal in shape, in accordance with the dimensions for the hex or
heavy hex series, by ANSI B 18.2.2 and ANSI B 18.2.4.6M. Heavy Hex Series can be either double
chamfered or have a machined or forged washer face. Nuts up to and including 1 in. must be UNC
Series Class 2B. Metric nuts up to and including M24 and over must be coarse thread series toler-
ance 6H. Nuts over 1 in. must be either UNC Series Class 2B fit or 8 UN Series Class 2B fit.

f) Identification of Materials: All nuts must be legibly marked on one face to indicate the grade and
process of the manufacturer, as shown below.
Grade and Type Brinnel Hardness C Scale B Scale

1 121 min 70 min
2 159 to 352 84 min
2H to 1 1/2 in. or M36, incl. 248 to 327 24 to 35
2H over 1 1/2 in. or M36 212 to 327 38 max 95 min
2HM and 7M 159 to 235 84 to 99
3, 4, 7, and 16 248 to 327 24 to 35
6 and 6F 228 to 271 20 to 28
g) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this section indicates the required variations, and chemical el e-
ments permitted. Table 1, Chemical requirements; Table 2, Hardness requirements; Table 3, Proof-
Load, Inch Series; Table 4, Proof-Load, Metric Series; Table 5, Proof-Stress 120 Steel Cone, Inch
Series; Table 6, Proof-Stress 120 Steel Cone, Metric Series; Table 7, Marking of Nuts; Table 8,
Proof-Load Testing of Strain Hardened Nuts, Inch Series; Table 9, Proof-Load Testing of Strain
Hardened Nuts, Metric Series; Table 10, Proof-Load for Large Heavy Hex Nuts, Inch Series; Table
11, Proof-Load for Large Heavy Hex Nuts, Metric Series.
h) Supplementary Requirements & Appendices: S1. Strain-Hardened Austenitic Steel Nuts; S2.
Retests by Purchasers Representative; S3. Low-Temperature Requirements for Grade 4, Grade 7
and Grade 7M Nuts; S4. Proof Load Tests of Large Nuts; S5. Control of Product by Heat Number;
S6. Grain Size Requirements for Non H Grade Austenitic Steels Used Above 1000F; S7. Coating
on Nuts; S8. Marking Coated Nuts. Appendices: X1. Strain Hardening of Austenitic Steels; X2. Coat-
ings and Application Limits.
19) SA-202/SA-202M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-
Manganese-Silicon:
This specification covers chromium-manganese-silicon alloy steel plates, used particularly for weld-
ed boilers and other pressure vessels, available in two grades having strength levels, as follows:
Grade A 75-95 ksi [515-655 MPa]; Grade B 85-110 ksi [585-760 MPa]. The maximum thickness cur-
rent practice normally limits the maximum thickness of plates furnished under this specification to 2
in. [50 mm]. The materials and tests covered by SA-202 are:
A 20/A 20M - Specification for General Requirements for Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels;
A 31 - Specification for Steel Rivets and Bars for Rivets, Pressure Vessels;
A 435/A 435M - Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates;
A 577/A 577M - Specification for Ultrasonic Angle-Beam Examination of Steel Plates;
A 578/A 578M - Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Plain and Clad Steel Plates for
Special Applications.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel is produced by killed process, normally supplied in the as-
rolled condition, and according to specification A 20/A 20M requirements.
b) Chemical Analysis: Each alloy steel must be conform to the chemical composition requirements

c) Heat Treatment: The plates may be ordered normalized, stress relieved, or both.
d) Inspection and Tests: The material must conform to the requirements shown in Table 2. Grade
A 75-95 ksi [515-655 MPa]; Grade B 85-110 ksi [585-760 MPa].
e) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this section indicates the required variations, and chemical el e-
ments permitted. Table 1, Chemical requirements; Table 2, Tensile requirements. Supplementary
requirements are included in Specification A 20/A 20M.
20) SA-203/SA-203M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Nickel:
This specification covers nickel-alloy steel plates intended primarily for welded pressure vessels,
available with four strength levels and two nickel compositions, as follows:
Grade Nickel Content Yield Strength, Tensile Strength, Thickness

% min. ksi - MPa min. ksi - MPa in. - mm
A 2.25 37 [255 65 [450] 6 [150]
B 2.25 40 [275] 70 [485] 6 [150]
D 3.50 37 [255] 65 [450] 6 [150]
E 3.50 40 [275] 70 [485] 6 [150]
F 3.50 6 [150]
2 in. [50 mm] and under; 55 [380] 80 [550]
Over 2 in. [50 mm] 50 [345] 75 [515]
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel is produced by killed process, conform to the fine grain
size, according to specification A 20/A 20M requirements.
prescribed in Table 1, unless otherwise modified in accordance with Supplementary Requirement
S17, Vacuum Carbon-Deoxidized Steel.
c) Heat Treatment: Grades A, B, D, and E are normalized, and cooling rates faster than air cooling
are permissible for improvement of the toughness, since the plates are subsequently tempered at
not less than 1100F [595C], not less than 1/2 h. Grade F are heat treated by heating into the aus-
tenitic range, quenching in water, and tempering at not less than 1100F [595C].
d) Inspection and Tests: The impact test requirements are; Grades A, B, D, and E, tested to Char-

py V notch impact tested, 20 ftlbf [27 J]. Grade F plates must be impact tested in accordance with
Supplementary Requirement S5 in Specification A 20/A 20M.
21) SA-204/SA-204M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Molybdenum:
This specification covers molybdenum-alloy steel plates, intended particularly for welded boilers and
other pressure vessels, available in three grades having different strength levels as follows:
Grade Tensile Strength, Thickness

min. ksi - MPa in. - mm
A 65 85 [450 - 585] 6 [150]
B 70 90 [485 - 620] 6 [150]
C 75 95 [515 - 655] 4 [100]
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel is produced by killed process, normally supplied in the as-
rolled condition, and according to specification A 20/A 20M requirements. Plates produced from coil
means plates that have been cut to individual lengths from coil.
prescribed in Table 1, unless otherwise modified in accordance with Supplementary Requirement
S17, Vacuum Carbon-Deoxidized Steel.
c) Heat Treatment: Plates 1 1/2 in. [40 mm] may be ordered normalized or stress relieved or both.
Plates over 11/2 in. [40 mm] in thickness shall be normalized.
d) Inspection and Tests: Conform to the requirements shown in Table 2. Grade A, 65 85 ksi,
[450 - 585] Mpa; Grade B, 70 90 ksi [485 - 620] Mpa; Grade C 75 95 ksi [515 - 655] Mpa.
e) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this section indicates the required variations, and the chemical ele-
22) SA-209/SA-209M Specification for Seamless Carbon-Molybdenum Alloy-Steel Boiler

and Superheater Tubes:

This specification covers several grades of minimum wall-thickness, seamless, carbon-molybdenum

alloy steel, boiler and superheater tubes, from 1/2 to 5 in. [12.7 to 127 mm] inclusive, in outside di-
ameter and 0.035 to 0.500 in. [0.9 to 12.7 mm], inclusive, in minimum wall thickness. Product must
conform to the requirements of Specification A 1016/A 1016M, including supplementary require-
ments indicated in the purchase order. Tubes are available in three grades as follows:
Grade Carbon, Molybdenum Tensile Strength, Brinnel Hardness, Brinnel Hardness,

min. % min. % min. ksi - MPa HBW HRB
0.200 in. and over less than 0.200 in.
T1 0.10 - 020 0.44 0.65 55 [380] 146 80
T1a 0.15 - 025 0.44 0.65 53 [365] 153 81
T1b 0.14 mx. 0.44 0.65 60 [415] 137 77
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel is produced by killed process, normally supplied by the
seamless process, either hot-finished or cold-finished.
b) Chemical Analysis: The alloy steel must conform to chemical composition requirements pres-
cribed in Table 1 of this Section, according to Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751.
c) Heat Treatment: Hot-finished tubes and cold-finished tubes, after the final cold finishing, must be
heat treated at a minimum temperature of 1200F [650C] or higher, or may be furnished in the full-
annealed, isothermal annealed, or normalized and tempered condition.
d) Inspection and Tests: Tension tests can be made on specimens from two tubes for lots of more
than 50 tubes. One flattening test and one flaring test must be made on specimens from each end
of one finished tube. Brinell or Rockwell hardness tests must be made on specimens from two tubes
from each lot. Tubes must stand expanding and beading without showing cracks or flaws, and when
properly manipulated also must stand forging, welding, and bending operations necessary for appli-
cation without developing defects.
ments permitted. Table 1, Chemical requirements; Table 2, Tensile requirements; Table 3, Compu-
ted minimum values; Table 4, Hardness requirements; Table 5, Lot of tubes heat-treated by contin-
uous process. Supplementary requirements, S1. Surface condition.
23) SA-210/SA-210M Specification for Seamless Medium-Carbon Steel Boiler and Su-
perheater Tubes:
This specification covers minimum-wall-thickness, seamless medium-carbon steel, boiler tubes and
boiler flues, including safe ends, arch and stay tubes, and superheater tubes, with outside diameters
available from 1/2 in. to 5 in. [12.7 to 127 mm] in. and minimum wall thickness from 0.035 to 0.500
in. [0.9 to 12.7 mm], inclusive. The materials and tests covered by SA-210 are:
A 520 Specif. for Supplementary Requirements for Seamless and Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel
Tubular Products for High-Temperature Service Conforming to ISO Recommendations for Boiler Construction;

a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel is produced by killed process. The tubes are made by the
seamless process and can be either hot-finished or cold-finished, conform to specification A 450/A
450M. The tubes have the designations of Grade A-1 and Grade C.
b) Chemical Analysis: The alloy steel must conform to the chemical composition requirements
prescribed in Table 1, in accordance with Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 75. The addi-
tion of any element other than those listed for the ordered grade is not permitted.
c) Heat Treatment: Hot-finished tubes need not be heat treated. Cold-finished tubes can be full an-
nealed, or a normalized after the final process.
d) Inspection and Tests: One tension test can be made on a specimen for lots of not more than 50
tubes. Flattening and flaring tests can be made specifically in each end of one finished tube from
each lot. Tears or breaks occurring at the 12 or 6 oclock positions on Grade C tubing with sizes of
2.375 in. [60.3 mm] in outside diameter and smaller shall not be considered a basis for rejection.
Brinell or Rockwell hardness test can be made on specimens from two tubes from each lot, and
must show a hardness not exceeding the following: 79 HRB or 143 HB for Grade A-1, 89 HRB or
179 HB for Grade C. The tubes must support expanding and beading without showing cracks or
flaws, and shall stand forging, welding and bending operations necessary for application without de-
veloping defects.
test is; each length of pipe must be tested by the manufacturer to a hydrostatic pressure that will
f) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this section indicates the required variations, and chemical ele-
ments permitted. Table 1, Chemical requirements; Table 2, Number of tubes in a lot heat-treated by
continuous process; Table 3, Tensile requirements, Table 4, Computed minimum elongation values.
24) SA-213/SA-213M Specification for Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic Alloy-Steel Boil-
er, Superheater, and Heat-Exchanger Tubes:
This specification covers seamless ferritic and austenitic steel boiler, superheater, and heat-ex-
changer tubes, are designated by several Grades T2, T5, TP 201, TP304, TP 316, TP 347, etc.
Grades containing the letter, H, must provide higher creep-rupture strength than other similar
grades. The tubing sizes and thicknesses are manufactured from 1/8 in. [3.2 mm] in inside diameter
to 5 in. [127 mm] in outside diameter and 0.015 to 0.500 in. [0.4 to 12.7 mm], inclusive, minimum
wall thickness. The materials and tests covered by SA-213 are:
A 1016/A 1016M - Specification for General Requirements for Ferritic Alloy Steel, Austenitic Alloy Steel, and
Stainless Steel Tubes;
E 112 - Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size.

a) Materials and Manufacture: These tubes are made by the seamless process and can be either
hot finished or cold finished. Grade TP347HFG are cold finished, conform to the requirements of
Specification A 1016/A 1016M.
b) Chemical Analysis: Each alloy and stainless steels must conform to the chemical composition
requirements prescribed in Table 1, and Table 2, respectively. The addition of any element other
than those listed for the ordered grade is not permitted.
c) Heat Treatment: Ferritic alloy, ferritic stainless steels and austenitic stainless steels must have a
heat treatment in accordance with the requirements of Table 3 in this section. The H grades, as well
as Grades S30815, S30942, S31035, S31272, and S33228, the tubes must be reheated to a spec i-
fied solution treatment temperature before quenching. Grain size should be in accordance with Test
Methods E 112, made on one end of tubes from each lot.
tubes. Flattening and flaring tests can be made specifically in each end of one finished tube from
each lot. Mechanical requirements do not apply to tubing smaller than 1/8 in. [3.2 mm] in inside di-
ameter or thinner than 0.015 in. [0.4 mm] in thickness.
Brinell or Rockwell hardness tests must follow the requirements of Table 4 of this section. The tubes
must support expanding and beading without showing cracks or flaws, and stand forging, welding
and bending operations necessary for application without developing defects.
ments permitted. Table 1, Chemical limits for low alloy steel; Table 2, Chemical limits for austenitic
and ferritic stainless steel; Table 3, Heat treatment and grain size requirements, Table 4, Tensile
and hardness requirements; Table 5, Computed minimum values; Table 6, Number of tubes heat-
treated by continuous process. Supplementary requirements: S1. Stress-Relieved Annealed Tubes;
S2. Stabilizing Heat Treatment; S3. Unstraightened Tubes; S4. Intergranular Corrosion Test.
25) SA-214/SA-214M Specification for Electric-Resistance Welded Carbon Steel, Heat-

Exchanger and Condenser Tubes:
This specification covers minimum-wall-thickness, electric-resistance-welded, carbon steel tubes to

be used for heat exchangers, condensers, and similar heat-transfer apparatus, usually furnished
with 3 in. [76.2 mm] in outside diameter, inclusive, according to specification A 450/A 450M.
a) Materials and Manufacture: These tubes are made by electric-resistance welding.
b) Chemical Analysis: Conform to the following chemical composition requirements: Carbon, max,
0.18%, Manganese, 0.27 - 0.63%, Phosphorus, max, 0.035%, Sulfur, 0.035% max. Alloy steel grade
that specifically requires the addition of any element other than those listed is not permitted.

c) Heat Treatment: After electric-resistance welding, all tubes are heat treated at a temperature of
1650F [900C] or higher, followed by cooling in air of a controlled atmosphere furnace. Cold drawn
tubes are heat treated at a temperature of 1200F [650C] or higher.
d) Inspection and Tests: Flattening and flange tests can be made specifically in each end of one
finished tube from each lot. One reverse flattening test can be made from each 1500 ft [450 m] of
finished tubing. Mechanical requirements do not apply to tubing smaller than 1/8 in. [3.2 mm] in in-
side diameter or thinner than 0.015 in. [0.4 mm] in thickness.
must have a hardness number not exceeding 72 HRB. The tubes must support expanding and
beading without showing cracks or flaws, and stand forging, welding and bending operations neces-
sary for application without developing defects.
26) SA-216/SA-216M Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Weld-
ing for High-Temperature Service:
This specification covers carbon steel castings for valves, flanges, fittings, or other pressure-parts
for high-temperature service, suitable for assembly with other castings or wrought-steel parts by fu-
sion welding. Three grades, WCA, WCB, and WCC, are covered in this specification, according to
design and service conditions, mechanical properties, and high temperature characteristics. The
A 703/A 703M - Specification for Steel Castings, General Requirements, for Pressure-Containing Parts;
A 985/A 985M - Specif. for Steel Investment Castings General Requirements, for Pressure-Containing Parts;
MSS SP 55 - Steel Castings for Valve, Flanges, and Fittings, and Other Components (Visual Method);
ASME - Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
a) Materials and Manufacture: General castings furnished to this specification must conform to the
requirements of Specification A 703/A 703M, including any supplementary requirements. Failure to
comply with these requirements are considered nonconformance with this specification. Investment
castings furnished to this specification must conform to the requirements of Specification A 985 /A
985M, including any supplementary requirements. Failure to comply with the general requirements
of Specification A 985 /A 985M are considered nonconformance with this specification.
Note: Investment casting is an industrial process based on and also called lost-wax casting, where
the material is poured into a ceramic cavity designed to create an exact duplicate of the desired
part. This casting process can include stainless steel alloys, brass, aluminum, and carbon steel.
b) Chemical Analysis: The steel must be in accordance with the requirements according to che -

mical compositions prescribed in Table 1. Addition of any other element is not permitted.
c) Heat Treatment: All casting materials are commonly furnished in the annealed, or normalized, or
normalized and tempered condition, and cooled below the transformation range.
d) Inspection and Tests: According to the requirements prescribed below:
Grade Carbon, Tensile Strength,

min. % min. ksi - MPa
WCA 0.25 60-85 [415-585]
WCB 0.30 70-95 [485-655]
WCC 0.25 70-95 [485-655]
e) Repair by Welding: Should be according to procedures and welders qualified under ASME Sec-
tion IX. Weld repairs on castings that have leaked on hydrostatic tests, or the depth of any cavity
prepared for welding repair exceeds 20% of the wall thickness or 1 in. [25 mm], must be stress re-
lieved or heat treated after welding, and radiographed to the same standards that are used to in-
spect the castings. Weld repairs can be also inspected by magnetic particle examination to the
same standards used to inspect the castings.
requirements for use at the option of the purchaser is included in Specification A 703/A 703M. S4.
Magnetic Particle Inspection; S5. Radiographic Inspection; S10. Examination of Weld Preparation;
S11. Carbon Equivalent; S15. Quench and Temper Heat-Treatment; S16. Requirements for Carbon
Steel Castings for Hydrofluoric Acid Alkylation Service.
27) SA-217/SA-217M Specification for Steel Castings, Martensitic Stainless and Alloy,
for Pressure Containing Parts, Suitable for High-Temperature Service:
This specification covers martensitic stainless steel and alloy steel castings for valves, flanges, fit-
tings, and other pressure-containing parts intended primarily for high-temperature and corrosive
service. This section indicates one grade of martensitic stainless steel and nine grades of ferritic al-
loy steels, where design and service conditions depend either on mechanical properties, or high-
temperature and corrosion-resistant characteristics. Materials and tests covered by SA-217 are:
A 216/A 216M Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature
Service;
A 352/A 352M - Specification for Steel Castings, Ferritic and Martensitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts, Suit-
able for Low-Temperature Service;
A 487/A 487M - Specification for Steel Castings Suitable for Pressure Service;
A 488/A 488M - Practice for Steel Castings, Welding, Qualifications of Procedures and Personnel;
A 802 /A 802M - Practice for Steel Castings, Surface Acceptance Standards, Visual Examination;
A 985/A 985M Specif. for Steel Investment Castings General Requirements, for Pressure-Containing Parts;

a) Materials and Manufacture: General castings furnished to this specification must conform to the
requirements of Specification A 703/A 703M, including any supplementary requirements. Failure to
comply with these requirements are considered nonconformance with this specification. Investment
castings furnished to this specification must conform to the requirements of Specification A 985 /A
985M, including any supplementary requirements. Failure to comply with the general requirements
of Specification A 985 /A 985M are considered nonconformance with this specification.
Note: Investment casting is an industrial process based on and also called lost-wax casting, where
the material is poured into a ceramic cavity designed to create an exact duplicate of the desired
part. This casting process can include stainless steel alloys, brass, aluminum, and carbon steel.
b) Chemical Analysis: The steel must be in accordance with the chemical requirements and com-
positions prescribed in Table 1. The addition of any element other than those listed for the ordered
grade is not permitted.
c) Heat Treatment: Castings are furnished in the normalized and tempered conditions; Grades
WC1, WC4, WC5, WC6, and CA15 are tempered at 1100F [595C] min. Grades WC9, C5, C12,
and WC11 are tempered at 1250F [675C] min. Grade C12A is normalized at 1900-1975F [1040
1080C] and tempered at 13501470F [730800C].
d) Inspection and Tests: According to the requirements prescribed below:
Grade Chemical Carbon, Tensile Strength,

Compos. min. % min. ksi [MPa]
WC1 Cr-Mo 0.25 65 [450] to 90 [620]
WC4 Ni-Cr-Mo 0.05-0.20 70 [485] to 95 [655]
WC5 Ni-Cr-Mo 0.05-0.20 70 [485] to 95 [655]
WC6 Cr-Mo 0.05-0.20 70 [485] to 95 [655]
WC9 Cr-Mo 0.05-0.18 70 [485] to 95 [655]
WC11 Cr-Mo 0.15-0.21 80 [550] to 105 [725]
C5 Cr-Mo 0.20 90 [620] to 115 [795]
C12 Cr-Mo 0.20 90 [620] to 115 [795]
C12A Cr-Mo 0.08-0.12 85 [585] to 110 [760]
CA15 V - Cr 0.15 90 [620] to 115 [795]
e) Repair by Welding: Procedures and welders are qualified under Practice A 488/A 488M (Stand-
ard Practice for Steel Castings, Welding, Qualications of Procedures and Personnel). Weld repairs
on castings that have leaked on hydrostatic tests, or the depth of any cavity prepared for welding
repair exceeds 20% of the wall thickness or 1 in. [25 mm], must be stress relieved or heat treated
after welding, and radiographed to the same standards that are used to inspect the castings. Weld
repairs can be also inspected by magnetic particle examination to the same standards used to in-
spect the castings. Weld repaired Grade C12A castings shall be postweld heat treated at 1350-
1470F [730-800C].
ments permitted. Table 1, Chemical requirements; Table 2, Tensile requirements. Table 3, Minimum
pre-heat temperatures. Supplementary requirements for use at the option of the purchaser is inclu-

ded in Specification A 703/A 703M. S4. Magnetic Particle Inspection; S5. Radiographic Inspection;
S10. Examination of Weld Preparation; S51. Mandatory Postweld Heat-Treatment.
28) SA-225/SA-225M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-
Vanadium-Nickel:
This specification covers manganese-vanadium-nickel alloy steel plates intended primarily for weld-
ed layered pressure vessels, available in two grades having different strength levels as follows:
Grade Carbon, min. % Tensile Strength, min. ksi [MPa]

C 0.25 105135 [725930]
D 0.20
3 in. [75 mm] and under 80105 [550725]
Over 3 in. [75 mm 75100 [515690]
Note: Current mill practice normally limits Grade C to 0.58 in. [15 mm] maximum and Grade D to 6
in. [150 mm] maximum.
Plates supplied to this product specification must conform to specification A 20/A 20M, which out-
lines the testing methods and procedures, permissible variations in dimensions, mass, quality and
repair of defects. Coils are excluded from qualification to this specification until they are processed
into finished plates. Materials and tests covered by SA-225 are:
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel must be killed, conform to the fine austenitic grain size
requirements of specification A 20/A 20M.
b) Chemical Analysis: The steel must be in accordance with the requirements as to chemical com-
position prescribed in Table 1, unless otherwise modified in accordance with Supplementary Re-
quirement S17, Vacuum Carbon-Deoxidized Steel, in Specification A 20/A 20M.
c) Heat Treatment: Grade D plates of all thicknesses and Grade C plates of thicknesses over 2 in.
[50 mm] shall be normalized or stress-relieved, or both, usually supplied in the as-rolled condition.
d) Inspection and Tests: Tension test specimens, are conform to the requirements given in Table
above. For plates with a nominal thickness of 3/4 in. [20 mm] and under, the 1 1/2 in. [40 mm] rec-
tangular specimen and a 2 in. [50 mm] gage length may be used, which includes the fracture and
elongation.
requirements for use at the option of the purchaser is inclu-ded in Specification A 20/A 20M.

29) SA-231/SA-231M Specification for Chromium-Vanadium Alloy Steel Spring Wire:
This specification covers round chromium-vanadium alloy steel spring wire having properties and
quality intended for the manufacture of springs used at moderately elevated temperatures. This wire
shall be either in the annealed and cold-drawn or oil-tempered condition as specified by the pur-
chaser. The materials and tests covered by SA-231 are:
A 752 - Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Alloy Steel;
ASME/ANSI B 32.4M - Preferred Metric Sizes for Round, Square, Rectangle, and Hexagon Metal Products.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel can be made by any commercially accepted steel-making
process, and may be either ingot cast or strand cast.
Note: A typical ordering description is as follows: 40 000 lb (20,000 kg) oil-tempered chromium-
vanadium alloy steel wire, size 0.250 in (6.00 mm) in 350 lb (150 kg) in coils to ASTM A 231M.
position prescribed in Table 3, unless otherwise modified in accordance with Supplementary Re-
quirement S17, Vacuum Carbon-Deoxidized Steel, in Specification A 20/A 20M.
c) Heat Treatment: One test specimen can be taken for each ten coils, in a lot, in accordance with
Test Methods and Definitions A 370. When purchased in the oil-tempered condition, the tensile
strength and minimum percent reduction of area, sizes 0.105 in. (2.50 mm) and coarser, must con-
form to the requirements in Table 1 or Table 2.
d) Inspection and Tests: The surface must be examined after etching in a solution of equal parts of
hydrochloric acid and heated water (approximately 80C), to remove up to approximately 1% of the
diameter of the wire. Test ends shall be examined using 10X magnification and no serious, scratch-
es, die marks or seams may be present.
To test for cast, a few convolutions of wire must be cut loose from the coil and placed on a flat sur-
face. The wire must lie flat on itself and not spring up nor show a wavy condition. Each coil shall be
one continuous length of wire properly coiled. Welds made prior to cold drawing are permitted, when
acceptable by the purchaser.
Wrap Test: Oil tempered or cold drawn wire of 0.162 in. (4.00 mm) and smaller in diameter must
wind on itself as an arbor without breakage. Larger diameter wire up to and including 0.312 in. (8.00
mm) in diameter shall wrap without breakage on a mandrel twice the wire diameter. The wrap test is
not applicable to wire over 0.312 in. (8.00 mm) in diameter.
Note: A manufacturers or suppliers certification must be furnished to the purchaser that the materi-
al was manufactured, sampled, tested, and inspected in accordance with this specification . The
method of packaging can be as agreed upon between the manufacturer and purchaser.

e) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this Section indicates the required variations, and chemical ele-
ments permitted. Table 1, Tensile requirements SI Units; Table 2, Tensile requirements Inch-
Pound Units; Table 3, Chemical requirements; Table 4, Permissible variations in wire diameter - SI
Units; Table 5, Permissible variations in wire diameter - Inch-Pound Units.
30) SA-232/SA-232M Specification for Chromium-Vanadium Alloy Steel Valve Spring

Quality Wire:
This specification covers the highest quality of round chromium-vanadium alloy steel valve spring
wire, uniform in quality and temper, intended for the manufacture of valve springs and other springs
requiring high-fatigue properties when used at moderately elevated temperatures. This wire must be
either in the annealed and cold-drawn or oil-tempered condition as specified by the purchaser. The
ASME/ANSI B32.4 - Preferred Metric Sizes for Round, Square, Rectangle, and Hexagon Metal Products.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel can be made by any commercially accepted steel-making
process, and may be either ingot cast or strand cast.
Note: A typical ordering description is as follows: 40 000 lb (20,000 kg) oil-tempered chromium-
vanadium alloy steel wire, size 0.250 in (6.00 mm) in 350 lb (150 kg) in coils to ASTM A 231M.
position prescribed in Table 2.
c) Heat Treatment: One test specimen can be taken for each ten coils, in a lot, in accordance with
Test Methods and Definitions A 370. When purchased in the oil-tempered condition, the tensile
strength and minimum percent reduction of area, sizes 0.105 in. (2.50 mm) and coarser, must con-
form to the requirements in Table 1.
d) Inspection and Tests: The surface must be examined after etching in a solution of equal parts of
hydrochloric acid and heated water (approximately 80C), to remove up to approximately 1% of the
diameter of the wire. Test ends must be examined using 10X magnification and no serious die
marks, scratches, or seams may be present.
For wires sizes 5.00 mm [0.192 in.], partial decarburization cannot exceed a depth of 0.025 mm
[0.001 in.], and for wires sizes larger than 5.00 mm [0.192 in.], partial decarburization cannot exceed
a depth of 0.038 mm [0.0015 in.].
To test for cast, a few convolutions of wire must be cut loose from the coil and placed on a flat sur-
face. The wire must lie flat on itself and not spring up nor show a wavy condition. Each coil must be
one continuous length of wire properly coiled. Welds made prior to cold drawing are permitted, when
acceptable by the purchaser.

Wrap Test: Oil tempered or cold drawn wire of 0.162 in. (4.00 mm) and smaller in diameter must
wind on itself as an arbor without breakage. Larger diameter wire up to and including 0.312 in. (8.00
mm) in diameter shall wrap without breakage on a mandrel twice the wire diameter. The wrap test is
not applicable to wire over 0.312 in. (8.00 mm) in diameter.
Note: A manufacturers or suppliers certification must be furnished to the purchaser that the materi-
al was manufactured, sampled, tested, and inspected in accordance with this specification . The me-
thod of packaging can be as agreed upon between the manufacturer and purchaser.
ments permitted. Table 1, Tensile requirements; Table 2, Chemical requirements; Table 3, Permis-
sible variations in wire diameter.
31) SA-234/SA-234M Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy
Steel for Moderate and High-Temperature Service:
This specification covers wrought carbon steel and alloy steel fittings of seamless and welded con-
struction covered by the latest revision of ASME B16.9, B16.11, MSS-SP-79, MSS-SP-83, and
MSS-SP-95. These fittings are for use in pressure piping and in pressure vessel fabrication for ser-
vice at moderate and elevated temperatures. This specification does not cover cast welding fittings
or fittings machined from castings, governed by Specifications A 216/A 216M and A 217/A 217M.
The materials and tests covered by SA-234 are:
A 216/A 216M - Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature
Service;
A 217/A 217M - Specification for Steel Castings, Martensitic Stainless and Alloy, for Pressure-Containing
Parts, Suitable for High-Temperature Service;
A 960/A 960M - Specification for Common Requirements for Wrought Steel Piping Fittings;
ASME/ANSI B16.9 - Steel Butt-Welding Fittings;
ASME/ANSI B16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded;
ASME Section V - Nondestructive Examination;
ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Pressure Vessels;
ASME Section IX - Welding Qualifications;
MSS-SP-25 - Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges, and Unions;
MSS-SP-79 - Socket Welding Reducer Inserts;
MSS-SP-83 - Steel Pipe Unions, Socket-Welding and Threaded;
MSS-SP-95 - Swaged Nipples and Bull Plugs;
ASNT SNT-TC-1A - Practice for Nondestructive Testing Personnel Qualification and Certification.
Note: Fittings differing from ASME and MSS standards can be furnished in accordance with Sup-
plementary Requirement S58 of Specification A 960/A 960M.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The material for fittings consist of killed steel, forgings, bars, plates,
seamless or fusion-welded tubular products. The steel for carbon steel plates may be made to either
coarse grain or fine grain practice, and Grade WP9 is made to fine grain practice. Forging or shap-
ing operations may be performed by hammering, pressing, piercing, extruding, upsetting, rolling,
bending, fusion welding, machining, or by a combination of two or more of these operations.

Note: Fittings NPS 4 and under may be machined from hot-forged or rolled, and straightened bar
stock having the chemical composition of the and the mechanical properties of the required Grade.
b) Chemical Analysis: The steel can be in accordance with the requirements as to chemical com-
position prescribed in Table 1. The ranges, as shown below, include variations of the chemical anal-
ysis requirements in various specifications for materials (pipe, tube, plate, bar, and forgings) normal-
ly used in the manufacturing of fittings to this specification.
Grade Chemical Carbon, Tensile Strength,

Compos. max. % min. ksi [MPa]
WPB Ni-Cr-Mo 0.30 6095 [415655]
WPC, Ni-Cr-Mo 0.35 70 to 95 [485-655]
WP11 CL2, Cr-Mo 0.050.15
WP12 CL2 Cr-Mo 0.050.20
WP1 C-Mo 0.28 5580 [380550]
WP11 CL1, Cr-Mo 0.050.15 6085 [415585]
WP22 CL1, Cr-Mo 0.050.15
WP5 CL1, Cr-Mo 0.15
WP9 CL1 Cr-Mo 0.15
WPR C-Ni 0.20 6388 [435605]
WP11 CL3, Cr-Mo 0.15-0.21 75100 [520690]
WP22 CL3, Cr-Mo 0.050.15
WP5 CL3, Cr-Mo 0.15
WP9 CL3 Cr-Mo 0.15
WP91 Ni-Cr-Mo 0.080.12 85 to 110 [585-760]
WP911 Ni-Cr-Mo 0.09-0.13 90 to 120 [620-840]
WP12 CL1 Cr-Mo 0.050.20 6085 [415585]
c) Heat Treatment: Hot-formed WPB, WPC, and WPR fittings above 1150F [620C] and below
1800F [980C] need not be heat treated provided they are cooled in still air. Above 1800F [980C]
must be annealed, normalized, or normalized and tempered. Hot-forged fittings NPS 4 or smaller
need not be heat treated. Cold-formed WPB, WPC, and WPR fittings, completed at a temperature
below 1150F [620C], are normalized, or stress relieved at 1100 to 1275F [595 to 690C].
Grades WP1, WP11 Class 1, WP11 Class 2, WP11 Class 3, WP12 Class 1, WP12 Class 2, WP22
Class 1, WP22 Class 3, WP5, and WP9 are furnished in the full-annealed, isothermal-annealed, or
normalized and tempered condition, tempering temperature cannot be less than 1150F [620C].
Grades WP5, WP9, WP22 Class 1, and WP22 Class 3 the tempering temperature shall not be less
than 1250F [675C]. Grades WP1, WP12 Class 1, or WP12 Class 2 either hot formed or cold
formed must have a heat treatment at 1200F [650C.
Grade WP91 is normalized at 1900F [1040C], and 1975F [1080C] and tempered at 1350F
[730C] to 1470F [800C] as a final heat treatment. Grade WP911 is normalized in the temperature
of 1900 to 1975F [1040 to 1080C], and tempered at 1365 to 1435F [740 to 780C] as a final heat
treatment. Liquid quenching and tempering are permitted for all grades. Tempering temperature of
1100F [595C] for WPB, WPC, and WPR, 1150F [620C] for Grades WP1, WP11 Class 1, WP11

Class 2, WP11 Class 3, WP 12 Class 1, and WP12 Class 2 and 1250F [675C] for Grades WP5,
WP9, WP22 Class 1, and WP22 Class 3, and 1350F [730C] for Grade WP91 and WP911.
d) Inspection and Tests: Tensile properties of the fitting material must conform to the requirements
listed in table above. One tension test must be made on the same condition of heat treatment, the
finished fittings it represents. For hardness testing, fittings of Grades WP5, WP9, and WPR, 217 HB
maximum. Fittings of Grade WP91 and WP911, 248 HB maximum. Fittings of all other grades, 197
HB maximum.
For nondestructive testing, such as radiographic examination, welds may be ultrasonically examined
in accordance with Appendix 12 of Section VIII. Grades WPB, WPC, WP1, WP11 Class 1, WP11
Class 2, WP11 Class 3, WP12 Class 1, WP12 Class 2, and WPR may be performed either prior to
or after forming. NDE of welds in Grades WP5, WP9, WP91, WP911, WP22 Class 1, and WP22
Class 3 can be done after forming. Butt-weld tees manufactured by cold-forming method must be
liquid penetrant or magnetic particle according to A 960/A 960M. Personnel must be qualified in ac-
cordance with SNT-TC-1A.
e) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this Section indicates the required variations, and chemical ele-
requirements S1. Alternative Heat Treatment, Grade WP91; S2. Restricted Vanadium Content; S3.
Carbon Equivalent.
32) SA-240/SA-240M Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel

Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels for General Applications:
This specification covers chromium, chromium-nickel, and chromium-manganese-nickel stainless

steel plate, sheet, and strip for pressure vessels and for general applications, according to applica-
ble requirements of Specification A 480/A 480M. The materials and tests covered by SA-240 are:
A 480/A 480M - Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel
Plate, Sheet, and Strip;
A 923 - Test Methods for Detecting Detrimental Intermetallic Phase in Wrought Duplex Austenitic/Ferritic
Stainless Steels;
E 527 - Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS).
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel is produced by killed process, conform to the fine grain
size, according to specification A 480/A 480M requirements. The materials referenced by this speci-
fication are very long, beginning with Austenitic (Chromium-Nickel, Chromium-Manganese-Nickel),
sheet and strip plates (N08800, N08810, N08820, S30400, S31266, etc.), Duplex (Austenitic-
Ferritic) sheet and strip steel plates (S31200, S31260, 31803, etc.), Ferritic or Martensitic (Chromi-
um) sheet and strip steel plates (S32803, S40500, S46800, etc.).
c) Heat Treatment: Must be in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370.

d) Inspection and Tests: The material must conform to the mechanical properties specified in Ta-
ble 2. When specified by the purchaser, Charpy impact tests can be performed in accordance with
Supplementary Requirement S1.
ments permitted. Table 1, Chemical requirements; Table 2, Tensile requirements. The supplemen-
tary requirements are: S1. Charpy Impact Testing of Plates; and S2. Materials for High-Temperature
Services.
Note: Test Method A 923, Method B uses a Charpy impact test for the purpose of determining the
absence of detrimental intermetallic phases, applicable to some duplex stainless steels. One impact
test (3 specimens) can be made per heat treatment lot in the final heat treated condition.
33) SA-249/SA-249M Specification for Welded Austenitic Steel Boiler, Superheater, Heat-
Exchanger, and Condenser Tubes:
This specification covers nominal-wall-thickness welded tubes and heavily cold worked welded
tubes made from the austenitic steels with various grades, intended for use in boilers, superheaters,
heat exchangers, or condenser tubes. The materials and tests covered by SA-249 are:
E 112 - Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size E 213 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal
Pipe and Tubing;
E 273 - Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of the Weld Zone of Welded Pipe and Tubing;
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel is produced by killed process, according to specification A
1016/A 1016M requirements. The welded (WLD) tubes are manufactured from flat rolled-steel by an
automatic welding process with no addition of filler metal. Cold worked (HCW) tubes are made by
applying cold working of not less than 35% reduction in both walls. The materials referenced by this
specification begin with TP201 (S20100), TP202 (S20200), TPXM-19 (S20910), TPXM-29
(S24000), TP304 (S30400), TP304L (S30403), TP304H (S30409), TP316 (S31600), TP316L
(S31603), etc.
c) Heat Treatment: All material must be furnished in the heat-treated condition. TP309HCb,
TP310HCb, TP321, TP321H, TP347, TP347H, TP348, and TP348H can be furnished with a solution
annealing temperature above 1950F [1065C] to impair the resistance to intergranular corrosion af-
ter exposure to sensitizing conditions. Grain size of Grades TP309H, TP309HCb, TP310H and
TP310HCb, must be No. 6 or coarser, and Grades TP304H, P316H, TP321H, TP 347H and
TP348H, must be No. 7 or coarser.

tubes. The material must conform to the tensile properties prescribed in Table 4. Fl attening and
flange tests can be made specifically in each end of one finished tube from each lot. One reverse-
bend test can be made on a specimen from each 1500 ft [450 m] of finished tubing.
Note: The reverse bend test is not applicable when the specified wall is 10 % or more of the speci-
fied outside diameter, or the wall thickness is 0.134 in. [3.4 mm] or greater, or the outside diameter
size is less than 0.375 in. [9.5 mm].
must have a hardness number according to Table 4. All tubes must be able to stand expanding and
beading without showing cracks and flaws, and must also stand forging, welding, and bending oper-
ations, without developing defects.
ments permitted. Table 1, Chemical requirements; Table 2, Heat-treatment requirements; Table 3,
Lot of tubes heat-treated bay continuous process; Table 4, Tensile and hardness requirements. The
supplementary requirements are: S1. Stress-Relieved Annealed Tubes, S2. Minimum Wall Tubes,
S3. Air Underwater Pressure Test, S4. Stabilizing Heat Treatment, S5. Deleted, S6. Intergranular
Corrosion Test, S7. Weld Decay Test, S8. Special Applications, S9. Additional Testing of Welded
Tubing per ASME Request.
34) SA-250/SA-250M Specification for Electric-Resistance Welded Ferritic Alloy-Steel

Boiler and Superheater Tubes:
This specification covers several grades, designated T1, T1a, T1b, T2, T11, T12 and T22, of mini-
mum-wall thickness, electric-resistance-welded, carbon-molybdenum and chromium-molybdenum
alloy-steel, usually furnished with outside diameter from 1/2 to 5 in. [12.7 to 127 mm], and minimum
wall thickness 0.035 to 0.320 in. [0.9 to 8.1 mm], generally used for boilers attachments and super-
heater tubes. The materials and tests covered by SA-250 are:
E 273 - Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of the Weld Zone of Welded Pipe and Tubing.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel is produced by killed process, according to specification A
1016/A 1016M requirements. The welded tubes are manufactured by electric-resistance welding.
position prescribed in Table 1. The specific grades for this specification are:

Grade Carbon, Molybdenum Tensile Strength, Brinnel Hardness, Brinnel Hardness,

min. % min. % min. ksi - MPa HBW HRB
0.200 in. and over less than 0.200 in.
T1 0.10 - 020 0.44 0.65 55 [380] 146 80
T1a 0.15 - 025 0.44 0.65 60 [415] 153 81
T1b 0.14 max. 0.44 0.65 53 [365] 137 77
T2 0.10 - 0.20 0.44 0.65 60 [415] 163 85
T11 0.05 - 0.15 0.44 0.65 60 [415] 163 85
T12 0.05 - 0.15 0.44 0.65 60 [415] 163 85
T22 0.15 max. 0.87 - 1.13 60 [415] 163 85
c) Heat Treatment: After welding, or when cold finished, all tubes must be heat treated and fur-
nished in the full annealed, isothermal annealed, normalized, or normalized and tempered condition.
The minimum tempering temperature must be 1200F [650C], except for T22, tempered at 1250F
[676C] minimum. When grades T1, T1a, T1b, and T2 are cold finished, the tubes may be heat
treated at a temperature of 1200F or higher.
tubes. The material must conform to the tensile properties prescribed in Table 4. Fl attening and
flange tests can be made specifically in each end of one finished tube from each lot. One reverse-
bend test shall be made on a specimen from each 1500 ft [450 m] of finished tubing.
Note: Mechanical property requirements do not apply to tubing smaller than 1/8 in. [3.2 mm] in in-
side diameter or 0.015 in. [0.4 mm] in thickness.
ments permitted. Table 1, Chemical requirements; Table 2, Tensile requirements; Table 3, Minimum
elongation requirements; Table 4, Hardness requirements; Table 5, Lot of tubes heat-treated by
continuous process. The supplementary requirement is, S1. Additional Testing of Welded Tubing for
100% Joint Efficiency in Certain ASME Applications.
35) SA-263 Specification for Stainless Chromium Steel-Clad Plate:
This specification covers plate of a carbon steel or low-alloy steel base to which is integrally and
continuously bonded on one or both sides a layer of stainless chromium steel. The material is gen-
erally intended for pressure vessel use. The materials and tests covered by SA-263 are:
A 6/A 6M - Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and
Sheet Piling;

A 240/A 240M - Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for
Pressure Vessels and for General Applications;
Special Applications;
A 751 - Test Methods, Practices and Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel Products;
ASME Section IX, Welding Qualifications.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel is made by the open-hearth, electric-furnace, or basic-
oxygen processes, or by secondary processes, but not limited to electroslag remelting or vacuum -
arc remelting processes. The base metal can be carbon steel or low-alloy steel conforming to the
ASME/ASTM specifications for pressure vessels. The alloy-cladding metal may be metallurgically
bonded to the base metal by any method that can produce a clad steel.
Note: Base metal (backing steel) is the component to which the alloy cladding is applied. Alloy clad-
ding is the stainless chromium steel component of the composite plate. Integrally and continuously
bonded is the condition in which the alloy cladding and base metal are brought together to form a
metallurgical bond of the two metals, by processes that do not produce a composite plate.
b) Chemical Analysis: The composite plate must conform to any desired combination of alloy-clad-
ding metal and base metal, as agreed upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer. The al-
loy-cladding metal must conform to the requirements as to chemical stainless chromium steel com-
position prescribed in this specification.
c) Heat Treatment: All plates must be furnished in the normalized, tempered, normalized and tem-
pered, or quenched and tempered condition as permitted by the backing steel specification. Stress
relieving of the composite plate by heating is permitted, since the temperature is 75F [40C] or
more stays below the minimum tempering temperature.
d) Inspection and Tests: The tensile properties can be determined by a tension test of the base
steel only for clad plates that meet one of the following conditions:
The composite gage is greater than 1 1/2 in;

The minimum tensile strength of the base steel is greater than 70 000 psi [485 MPa];
The minimum yield strength of the base steel is greater than 40 000 psi [275 MPa];
When the cladding is for corrosion only, the cladding need not be included in the tensile test.
Bond strength tests must be specified by the purchaser and consist of one of the following:
Shear Strength: The minimum shear strength of the alloy cladding and base metals must be
20 000 psi [140 MPa].
Bond Strength: As an alternative to shear strength test, three bend tests can be made with
the compressed alloy cladding, to determine the quality of the bond.

The tension tests (indicated in figure below) is bent through an angle of 180 of the bend di-
ameters according to specification A 6/A 6M or specification A 20/A 20M, Appendix X4.
At least two of the three tests must show not more than 50% separation, on both edges of
the bent portion.
e) Repair of Cladding by Welding: The welding procedure and the welders must be qualified in
accordance with Section IX of the ASME Code. The defective area must be removed and examined
by a magnetic particle method or a liquid penetrant method to ensure all defective area has been
removed. The repair weld must be deposited in accordance with the welding procedure and welding
materials suitable for the cladding material and after examined by liquid penetrant. Repairs in alloy
Type 410 and Type 410S penetrating into the backing steel must be stress relieved to eliminate re-
sidual stresses unless otherwise specified.
f) Quality Levels: Clad plates less than 3/8 in. [10 mm] and thicker must be visually and ultrasoni-
cally inspected for bond integrity prior to shipment. Permissible variation in thickness when ordered
to nominal thicknesses must be 0.01 in. [0.3 mm] for backing steel or total composite, and 0.03 in.
[0.8mm] for the alloy cladding.
Ultrasonic examination must be in accordance with purchaser, to provide the required quality levels.
The cladding can be interpreted to be unbonded, when there is a complete loss of back reflection
accompanied by an echo indication from the plane interface of the clad and backing steel. Areas
within 1 in. [25 mm] of a cut edge that contain indications exceeding 50% of the back reflection at
the bond interface must be considered to be unbonded. The cladding classifications are:
Class 1: No single unbonded area exceeding 1 in. [25 mm] in its longest dimension with total
unbounded area cannot exceed 1% of the total cladded surface area;

Class 5: No single unbonded area exceeding 9 in. [58 cm] with total unbonded area cannot
exceed 5% of the total cladded surface area.
Note: When none has been specified, plates are furnished as Class 5.
36) SA-264 Specification for Stainless Chromium-Nickel for Steel-Clad Plate:
This specification covers plate of a carbon steel or low-alloy steel base to which is integrally and
continuously bonded on one or both sides a layer of stainless chromium-nickel steel. The material is
generally intended for pressure vessel use. The materials and tests covered by SA-264 are:
Sheet Piling;
A 240/A 240M - Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for
Pressure Vessels and for General Applications;
A 751 - Test Methods, Practices and Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel Products;
ASME Section IX, Welding Qualifications.
oxygen processes, or by secondary processes, but not limited to electroslag remelting or vacuum -
Note: Base metal (backing steel) is the component to which the alloy cladding is applied. Alloy clad-
ding is the stainless chromium steel component of the composite plate. Integrally and continuously
bonded is the condition in which the alloy cladding and base metal are brought together to form a
metallurgical bond of the two metals, by processes that do not produce a composite plate.
ding metal and base metal, as agreed upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer. The al-
loy-cladding metal must conform to the requirements as to chemical stainless chromium steel com-
position prescribed in this specification.
c) Heat Treatment: All plates must be furnished in the normalized, tempered, normalized and tem-
pered, or quenched and tempered condition as permitted by the backing steel specification. Stress
relieving of the composite plate by heating is permitted, since the tem perature is 75F [40C] or
more stays below the minimum tempering temperature.
d) Inspection and Tests: The tensile properties can be determined by a tension test of the base
steel only for clad plates that meet one of the following conditions:


Bond strength tests must be specified by the purchaser and consist of one of the following:
20 000 psi [140 MPa].
the bent portion.
materials suitable for the cladding material and after examined by liquid penetrant. Repairs in chro-
mium-nickel stainless steels penetrating into the backing base must be stress relieved to eliminate
residual stresses unless otherwise specified.

37) SA-265 Specification for Nickel and Nickel-Base Alloy-Clad Steel Plate:
This specification covers plates of carbon steel or low-alloy steel bases, to which a layer of nickel or
nickel base alloy, is integrally bonded on one or both sides. This clad material is considered as sin-
gle-clad or double-clad nickel or nickel-base alloy clad steel plates, depending on whether one or
both sides are covered, and applies to steel plates 3/16 in. (2.73 mm) and over in thickness, and
over 10 in. (254 mm) in width. The materials and tests covered by SA-265 are:
Sheet Piling;
B 127 - Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy (UNS N04400) Plate, Sheet, and Strip;
B 162 - Specification for Nickel Plate, Sheet, and Strip;
B 168 - Specification for Nickel-Chromium-Iron Alloy (UNS N06600, N06601, N06603, N06690, N06025, and
N06045) and Nickel-Chromium-Cobalt-Molybdenum Alloy (UNS N06617) Plate, Sheet, and Strip;
B 333 - Specification for Nickel-Molybdenum Alloy Plate, Sheet, and Strip;
B 409 - Specification for Nickel-Iron-Chromium Alloy Plate, Sheet, and Strip;
B 424 - Specification for Nickel-Iron-Chromium-Mo-Cu Alloy (UNS N08825 and N08221) Plate, Sheet, and
Strip B 443 Specif. for Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum-Columbium Alloy (UNS N06625) and Nickel-Chromium-
Molybdenum-Silicon Alloy (UNS N06219) Plate, Sheet, and Strip;
B 463 - Specification for UNS N08020, UNS N08026, and UNS N08024 Alloy Plate, Sheet, and Strip;
B 575 Specif. for Low-Carbon Nickel-Molybdenum-Chromium, Low-Carbon Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum,
Low-Carbon Nickel-Chromium Molybdenum-Copper, Low-Carbon Nickel-Chromium Molybdenum-Tantalum,
and Low-Carbon Nickel-Chromium Molybdenum Tungsten Alloy Plate, Sheet, and Strip;
B 582 - Specification for Nickel-Chromium-Iron-Molybdenum-Copper Alloy Plate, Sheet, and Strip;
B 625 - Specification for UNS N08904, UNS N08925, UNS N08031, UNS N08932, UNS N08926, and UNS
R20033 Plate, Sheet, and Strip;

ASME Section IX Welding Qualifications.
Note: This clad material is generally intended for pressure vessel use, but may be used in other
structural applications where corrosion resistance of the alloy is of prime importance.
oxygen processes, or by secondary processes, but not limited to electroslag remelting or vacuum-
Note: Base metal (backing steel) usually consists of carbon or low-alloy steel, to which the alloy
cladding is applied. Alloy cladding is the nickel or nickel-base alloy component of the composite
plate. Integrally and continuously bonded is the condition in which the alloy cladding and base metal
are brought together to form a metallurgical bond of the two metals, by processes that do not pro-
duce a composite plate.
ding metal and base metal according to this specification. The nickel or nickel-base alloy cladding
metal must conform to the chemical composition requirements, in conformance with the Specifica-
tions B 127, B 162, B 168, B 333, B 409, B 424, B 443, B 463, B 575, B 582, and B 625, or other
nickel-base alloy, as agreed upon by the purchaser and manufacturer.
c) Heat Treatment: Unless a specific heat treatment is required by the cladding material or the base
steel specification, the clad plate can be furnished in a condition that is appropriate for the cladding
alloy, base metal or otherwise agreed upon by the purchaser and manufacturer.
d) Inspection and Tests: The bend test specimen used for bond strength determination must be 1
1/2 in. (38 mm) by 3/4 in. (19 mm) in thickness, machined to the standard form and dimensions. Al-
ternative bond strength tests can be taken at right angles to its longitudinal axis. For plates up to 1
1/2 in. (38 mm) in thickness, tension test specimens can be the full thickness of the material. For
plates over 1 1/2 in. (38 mm) in thickness, tension tests can be as shown in figure below, and in
conformance with the specification of the base steel.
The tensile properties can be determined by a tension test of the base steel only for clad plates that
meet one of the following conditions:

Bond strength tests for of the bond, specified by the purchaser consist of one of the following:
20 000 psi [140 MPa].

the bent portion.
materials suitable for the cladding material and after examined again, by liquid penetrant.

Standard Test Specimens 8 in. and 2 in. Gage Length, respectively
Obs.: Methods relating to mechanical testing required by all specifications of this type must be in
accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370.
38) SA-266/SA-266M Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Pressure Vessel Com-
ponents:
This specification covers four grades of carbon steel forgings for boilers, pressure vessels, and as-
sociated equipment. The materials and tests covered by SA-265 are:
E 112 - Test Methods for Determining the Average Grain Size;
ASME Section IX Welding Qualifications.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel shall be made in accordance with the Melting Process
Section of Specification A 788, forged as close as practical to the specified shape and size. This
specification covers four classes of materials, as shown below:
Grade Carbon, Tensile Strength, Brinnel Hardness,

max. % min. ksi - MPa HB
1 0.30 6085 [415585] 121 to 170
2 0.30 7095 [485655] 137 to 197
3 0.35 75100 [515690] 156 to 207
4 0.30 7095 [485655] 137 to 197
b) Chemical Analysis: The forged steel classes must be in accordance with the requirements as to
chemical composition prescribed in Table 1, in accordance with Specification A 788. Additional fea-
tures of Supplementary Requirements S11 and S12 can apply, when specified in purchase order.

c) Heat Treatment: All forgings are annealed, normalized, or normalized and tempered, but alterna-
tively may be liquid quenched and tempered. Tempering must be at a subcritical temperature, but
no less than 1,100F [595C]. A multiple stage austenitizing procedure may be used and liquid
quen-ched, followed by a reheating within the temperature range, and again liquid quenched. For
forgings and forged bars weighing over 5,000 lb [2250 kg] at the time of heat treatment, one tension
test shall be taken from each forging.
d) Inspection and Tests: Tension test must be taken from a location that represents the midwall of
the heaviest section of the production forgings. When specimens are required from opposite ends
are taken from the diagonal corners of an axial plane. Test specimens may be machined from a
specially forged block suitably worked and heat treated with the production forgings, obtained from
an ingot, slab, or billet from the same heat used to make the forgings it represents. Tests for ac-
ceptance must be made after heat treatment has been completed.
For quenched and tempered forgings and forged bars weighing over 5,000 lb [2250 kg] to 10,000 lb
[4,500 kg] at the time of heat treatment, and forged bars that exceed 12 ft [3.7 m] in length, one ten-
sion test can be taken from each forging. For quenched and tempered forgings and forged bars
weighing more than 10,000 lb [4500 kg] at the time of heat treatment, two tension test specimens
can be taken from each forging.
e) Repair by Welding: The welding procedure and the welders must be qualified in accordance
with Section IX of the ASME Code. Repair welding of forgings is permissible only with the authoriza-
tion of the purchaser. The defective area must be removed and examined by a magnetic particle
method or a liquid penetrant method to ensure all defective area has been removed.
f) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this section indicates the required variations permitted. Table 1,
Chemical requirements; Table 2, Tensile requirements. Supplementary requirements: S1. Rough
Turning and Boring, S2. Alternative Tension Test Orientation, S3. Hydrostatic Test, S4. Magnetic
Particle Examination, S5. Liquid Penetrant Examination, S6. Macroetch Test, S7. Product Analysis,
S8. Specimen Location on Forged Hubs, S9. Hardness, S10. Grain Size, S11. Restriction on Resid-
ual Elements (Applicable to Heat Analysis), S12. Restriction on Carbon (Applicable to Grade I), S13.
Impact Tests, S14. Individual Forging, S15. Carbon Equivalency.
39) SA-268/SA-268M Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic and Martensitic
Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service:
This specification covers a number of grades of nominal-wall-thickness, stainless steel tubing for
general corrosion-resisting and high-temperature service, as, TP405 (S40500), TP410 (S41000),
P429 (S42900), TP430 (S43000), TP430 (S43036), TP443 (S44300), TP446 (S44600), etc. Most of
these grades are commonly known as the straight-chromium types, and are characterized by be-
ing ferromagnetic. The materials and tests covered by SA-265 are:
A 763 - Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular Attack in Ferritic Stainless Steels;


E 273 - Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of the Weld Zone of Welded Pipe and Tubing.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The tubes are made by the seamless or welded process with no
filler metal added.
b) Chemical Analysis: The steel must conform to the chemical requirements prescribed in Table 1.
When intergranular corrosion testing is specified in the purchase order, the test can be made in ac-
cordance with Practices A 763.
c) Heat Treatment: Tubes must be reheated to a temperature of 1200F [650C] or higher and
cooled (as appropriate) to meet the requirements of this specification, except the martensitic grade
UNS S41500 that must be reheated to a temperature of 950F [510C] or higher and cooled.
tubes. For the flaring test (only for Seamless Tubes), the minimum expansion of the inside diameter
can be 10%. For the flange test (only for Welded Tubes) only one test is made on specimens from
one end of one tube, from each lot of finished tubes. For tubes over 8 in. [203.2 mm] in outside di-
ameter, or tubes with wall thickness 38 in. [9.52 mm] and over, only the flattening test may be per-
formed, instead of the flaring and flange tests.
Note: The reverse bend test, for welded tubes, one reverse flattening test can be made on a speci-
men from each 1500 ft [450 m] of finished tubing. Brinell or Rockwell hardness tests can be made
on specimens from two tubes from each lot, according to Table 5.
ments permitted. Table 1, Chemical requirements; Table 2, Lot of tubes heat-treated by continuous
process; Table 3, Tensile requirements; Table 4, Minimum elongation values; Table 5, Hardness re-
quirements; Table 6, Permissible variations in dimensions. Supplementary requirements: S1. Air-
Underwater Pressure Test, S2. Additional Testing of Welded Tubing for 100% of Joint Efficiency in
Certain ASME Applications.
40) SA-275/SA-275M Test Method for Magnetic Particle Examination of Steel Forgings:
This test method covers a procedure for magnetic particle examination of steel forgings, which may
produce consistent results upon acceptance standards. Only a direct current or a rectified alternat-
ing (full or half wave) current must be used as the electric power source. Alternating current is not
permitted because its capability to detect subsurface discontinuities is very limited and therefore un-
suitable. Portable battery-powered electromagnetic yokes are outside the scope of this test method.
Note: Guide E 709 may be utilized for magnetic particle examination in the field for machinery com-
ponents originally manufactured from steel forgings. The minimum requirements for magnetic parti-

cle examination must conform to standards of Practice E 1444. This standard does not contain ac-
ceptance standards or recommended quality levels.

E 1444 - Practice for Magnetic Particle Testing;
ASNT SNT-TC-1A - Supplement B Magnetic Particle Method.
a) Basis of Application: When in accordance with the requirements of the inquiry, contract, order,
or specifications, forgings are subjected to magnetic particle examination. Unless otherwise speci-
fied by the purchaser, the acceptance inspection is performed on a forging in the final machined sur-
face and final thermally treated condition, (including stress relief), or within 0.030 in. [0.8 mm] of the
final machined surface.
Rectified alternating (full or half wave) or direct current electric power sources may be used. When
current is passed, the equipment must consist of contacting or clamping elements with sufficient sur-
face area and clamping pressure, to allow the required current to flow without damaging (burning)
the part being examined. Portable electromagnetic (ac-dc) yokes may be used in the dc mode, as a
magnetic particle apparatus, since the sensitivity to detect crack-like defects, can demonstrate to be
at least equivalent to the direct-magnetization method. The two general types of magnetization are
longitudinal and circular, as follows:
Longitudinal: When a forging is magnetized longitudinally, the magnetic flux lines are usual-
ly parallel to the axis of the piece. A longitudinally magnetized piece always has definite
poles readily detectable by compass or magnetometer. Longitudinal magnetization is usually
accomplished by placing the forging within a solenoid, often formed by wrapping cable
around the piece. For special applications, magnetic yokes can be used.
Circular: Circular magnetization is obtained by passing a current directly through the piece,
or induced through a conductor, or conductors threaded through an opening in the piece.
Localized circular magnetization may be obtained by passing current through the local areas
by use of prod-type contacts. The magnetic field is confined almost entirely to the piece and
there may be no external manifestation of the magnetized condition. Indications will appear
strongest in the direction perpendicular to the direction of the magnetic field.
b) Prod Magnetization: When prods are used to circularly magnetize a local area, the field strength
is directly proportional to the amperage used, but also varies with the prod spacing and thickness of
section being inspected. For example, indirect circular magnetization of the bores of shaft forgings
must be performed using a current of 100 to 125 A per inch [4 to 5 A per millimeter] of bore diam e-
ter. Examinations must be conducted to assure 100% coverage at the established sensitivity.
c) Surface Preparation: The surfaces shall be free of grease, oils, or other substances to which the
particles may adhere.
d) Magnetic Particles: The inspection medium must consist of finely divided ferromagnetic parti-
cles, which may be suspended in a suitable liquid medium, or used in dry powder form. The size,
shape and magnetic properties of the particles, are very important.

Dry Method: In the dry method the particles shall be applied from a hand-shaker (such as a
shaker can), mechanical shaker, bulb blower, or mechanical blower. The use of the shaker is
limited to flat and nearly horizontal surfaces, whereas the blowers may be used on vertical or
overhead surfaces. The powder is applied evenly on the surface of the forging. The color of
the dry powder should be chosen to provide suitable contrast. Too much powder is disad-
vantageous as it masks the patterns.
Wet Methods: Are divided in three methods, as shown below:
1. Oil: The material for the wet method is usually supplied in concentrate form, and the inspec-
tion medium shall be prepared by mixing the concentrate with a suitable light oil. The liquid
recommended for the inspection vehicle is a well refined, light, petroleum distillate having a
relatively high flash point. A suspension of from 1 to 2% solid material by volume is common-
ly used. The inspection medium is flowed or sprayed over the area being inspected. The col-
or of the particles can be chosen to provide a suitable contrast. The approximate characteris-
tics of a suitable liquid are as follows:
API gravity 46;

Viscosity, SUS 31;
Flash point (Tag Open Cup), F [C] 155 to 175 [65 to 80];
Initial boiling point, F [C] 390 [200];
End point, F [C] 490 [255];
Color, Saybolt 25.
2. Water: Magnetic particles suspended in clean water, with suitable wetting agents may be
used. Suspension from 2 to 2 1/2% solid material by volume is commonly used.
3. Fluorescent: Fluorescent magnetic particle inspection is a variation of the wet method. The
concentrate is similar to that used in the wet method, except that the magnetic particle is
mixed with a material that fluoresces when activated by black light. The examination is
conducted in a darkened area using a black light, and the light intensity is, at least 1000
W/cm, at a distance of 15 in. from the lamp. The black light can emit a wavelength ultravio-
let radiation within the range from 3300 to 3900 A. Fluorescent particles (iron oxides) are
coated with pigments that fluoresce when exposed to ultraviolet light. The light bulb has to
warm up for a minimum of 5 min. prior to its use, in fluorescent examination.
Note: The vehicle is not fluorescent when the same procedure is specified to only mixing the wet
medium. The suspension must contain 0.1 to 0.7% of solid material by volume when petroleum dis-
tillate or water is used, but the vehicle is not fluorescent.
e) Demagnetization: When specified, all parts can be demagnetized after inspection, so that the
residual field cannot interfere with future welding or machining operations, magnetic instruments
used in the proximity of the part, or leakage fields cannot occur in areas of dynamic contact surfac-
es. The demagnetization methods are:

Direct current: Demagnetizing may usually be accomplished by repeatedly reversing and

progressively decreasing the magnetizing current. The initial field strength used during de-
magnetization can be equal to or greater than the original magnetizing force. When the cur-
rent is reduced to the vanishing point, the part is practically demagnetized. Direct current is
recommended for demagnetizing large parts.
Alternating current: It is necessary merely to decrease the magnetizing current in small

steps or continuously to a very low current. Demagnetization is not necessary if the piece is
subject to an austenitizing treatment, prior to future use or machining.
Surface defects that produce sharp, distinct, clear-cut, tightly adhering patterns. These may general-
ly be interpreted from characteristic indications as follows:
Laminar Defects: Give strong indications which are parallel to the surface.
Forging Laps and Fold: Are indications that may not be very heavy, and are not straight.
They follow metal flow lines.
Flakes: Thermal ruptures caused by entrapped hydrogen) can occur in areas that have been
machined away. They are characterized by irregular, scattered indications.
Shrinkage Crack: Indications are very strong and sharp, usually continuous with few
branches, and occur at changes of section.
f) Permanent Recording of Data: May be made by covering the surface with transparent, adhe-
sive-backed, cellophane tape. The tape is removed with the particle indication adhering to it, and
then, may then be placed on white paper or cardboard and photographed or otherwise reproduced.
g) NDT Personnel: Personnel performing the magnetic particle examination to this test method
shall be qualified and certified in accordance with a written procedure conforming to Recommended
Practice No. SNT-TC-1A or another national standard that is acceptable.
Longitudinal Magnetization Circular Magnetization with a Conductor
41) SA-276 Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes:
This specification covers hot-finished or cold-finished bars except bars for reforging. It includes
rounds, squares, and hexagons, and hot-rolled or extruded shapes, such as angles, tees, and

channels in several grades, as the more commonly used types of stainless steels. To use free-
machining types for general corrosion resistance and high-temperature services, see Specification A
582/A 582M. The materials and tests covered by SA-276 are:
A 314 - Specification for Stainless Steel Billets and Bars for Forging;
A 484/A 484M - Specification for General Requirements for Stainless Steel Bars, Billets, and Forgings;
A 582/A 582M - Specification for Free-Machining Stainless Steel Bars;
a) Materials and Manufacture: Bars are furnished in accordance with specification A 484/A 484M
in the following condition: Condition A annealed; Condition H - hardened and tempered at a rela-
tively low temperature; Condition T - hardened and tempered at a relatively high temperature; Con-
dition S - strain hardened - relatively light cold work; Condition B - relatively severe cold work.
Note: The multiple grades covered by this specification are the most common used types of chro-
mium-nickel or chromium-nickel-molybdenum stainless steels, such as, Type 201, 202, 205, 305,
308, 310, 316, XM-10, XM-19, etc.
b) Chemical Analysis: The steel must conform to the chemical requirements prescribed in Table 1,
in accordance with Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751.
c) Heat Treatment: When required by the purchase order, the magnetic permeability of Types 201
and 205 are furnished in the annealed condition.
d) Inspection and Tests: Must conform to the mechanical test requirements specified in Table 2.
ments permitted. Table 1, Chemical requirements; Table 2, Mechanical requirements; Table 3, Re-
sponse to Heat-Treatment.
42) SA-278/SA-278M Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Pressure-Containing Parts
for Temperatures up to 650 F (350 C):
This specification covers gray iron for castings suitable for pressure-containing parts for use at tem-
peratures up to 650F (350C). In imperial units, Class 40, 45, 50, 55, and 60 castings are suitable
for temperatures above 450F and up to 650F. In metric units, Class 275, 300, 325, 350, 380, and
415 castings are suitable for temperatures above 230C and up to 350C. Castings of all classes
are suitable for use up to 230C. The materials and tests covered by SA-278 are:
A 644 - Terminology Relating to Iron Castings;

E 8 - Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials.
a) Materials and Manufacture: All castings are made in conformance with the drawings dimensions
furnished by the purchaser, poured into a single ladle or single batch type melting furnace. If the
pattern is supplied by the purchaser without drawings, the dimensions of the casting are according

to the manufacturer pattern. The test bars must be cast in dried siliceous sand molds, maintained at
approximately room temperature.
Note: The multiple grades covered by this specification are 40, 45, 50, 55, 60 in imperial units,
and 275, 300, 325, 350, 380, and 415 in metric units. Casting Class 40 means tensile strength mi-
nimum of 40 ksi. Casting Class 250 means tensile strength minimum of 250 MPa.
b) Chemical Analysis: The steel must conform to the chemical requirements prescribed in Table 1,
in accordance with Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751. Carbon equivalency for all
castings of this specification must have a maximum carbon equivalent of 3.8%, calculated from the
equation CE p %C + 0.3 (%Si + %P). The maximum phosphorus and sulfur contents must be 0.25%
and 0.12%, respectively.
c) Heat Treatment: Heat treatment is required for all classes to be used is at temperatures at 450F
or less. The heating and cooling rates must be uniform and not more than 400F/h (250C/h), for
castings of 1 in. (25 mm) maximum section. For heavier sections the maximum heating and cooling
rates must be 400F/h (250C/h), divided by the maximum section thickness.
d) Inspection and Tests: Castings to this specification must conform to the tensile requirements
prescribed in Table 3 and Table 4. The size of the test bar to be poured is selected by the purchaser
according to Table 5. The minimum tensile strength requirement for tension tests performed on the-
se test bars must be 80% of the specified class. One tension test can be performed on each lot in
accordance with Test Method E 8, conform to the specified tensile requirements. If, after testing, a
test specimen shows evidence of a defect, the results of the test may be invalidated and another
made on a specimen from the same lot.
e) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this section indicates the required variations and conformance:
Table 1, Diameters and lengths of cast test bars; Table 2, Stress-Relieving requirements; Table 3
and 4, Tensile requirements; Table 5, Separately cast test bars for use in a specific correlation.
43) SA-283/SA-283M Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon
Steel Plates:
This specification covers four grades (A, B, C, and D) of carbon steel plates of structural quality for
general application, subject to the product analysis and tolerances in specification A 6/A 6M, as
shown below:

max. % min. ksi - MPa
A 0.14 4560 [310415]
B 0.17 5065 [345450]
C 0.24 5575 [380515]
D 0.27 6080 [415550]
Sheet Piling.

a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel is made by one or more of the following processes: open-
hearth, basic-oxygen, or electric-furnace. Coils are excluded from this qualification, until the coils are
processed into finished plates. Such operations include decoiling, leveling, cutting to length, testing,
inspection, conditioning, heat treatment, packaging, marking, shipment, and certification.
b) Chemical Analysis: The heat analysis must conform to the requirements prescribed in Table 1.
c) Heat Treatment: Specification A 6/A 6M applies for plates produced from coils and furnished
without heat treatment or with stress relieving only, and the additional requirements include addi-
tional testing requirements.
d) Inspection and Tests: The test specimens must conform to the requirements as to tensile prop-
erties prescribed in Table 2.
Table 1, Chemical requirements; Table 2, Tensile requirements.
44) SA-285/SA-285M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low and In-
termediate Tensile Strength:
This specification covers carbon steel plates of low and intermediate-tensile strengths which may be
made by killed, semi-killed, capped, or rimmed steel at the producers option. These plates are in-
tended for fusion welded pressure vessels, in accordance with specification A 20/A 20M.
A 20/A 20M - Specification for General Requirements for Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels.
Plates under this specification are available in three grades with different strength levels as follows:

max. % min. ksi - MPa
A 0.17 4565 [310450]
B 0.22 5070 [345485]
C 0.28 5575 [380515]
Note: For killed carbon steels only refer to the following ASME/ASTM specifications.
A 299/A 299M - Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese- Silicon;

A 515/A 515M - Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate and Higher-Temperature Service;
A 516/A 516M - Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate and Lower-Temperature Service.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel is made by one or more of the following processes: open-
hearth, basic-oxygen, or electric-furnace. Coils are excluded from this qualification, until the coils are
c) Heat Treatment: Plates are normally supplied in the as-rolled condition. The plates may be or-

ordered normalized or stress relieved, or both.
d) Inspection and Tests: The test specimens must conform to the requirements as to tensile prop-
erties prescribed in Table 2.
45) SA-299/SA-299M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manga-
nese-Silicon:
This specification covers manganese-silicon carbon steel plates for use in welded boilers and other
pressure vessels. Plates under this specification are produced in two grades, as shown below:
Grade Carbon, Manganese Tensile Strength,

max. % % min. ksi - MPa
A 0.26 0.90 to 1.40 7595 [515655]
B 0.28 0.84 to 1.52 80-100 [550-690]
Over 1 in. [25 mm]
A 0.28 0.90 to 1.50
B 0.30 0.84 to 1.62
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel is killed and must conform to the fine grain size require-
ments of the specification A 20/A 20M. Coils are excluded from this qualification, until the coils are
b) Chemical Analysis: The heat analysis must conform to the requirements prescribed in Table 1
of this Section, unless otherwise modified in accordance with Supplementary Requirement S17,
Vacuum Carbon-Deoxidized Steel in specification A 20/A 20M.
c) Heat Treatment: Plates 2 in. [50 mm] and under in thickness are normally supplied in the rolled
condition. Plates may be ordered normalized or stress relieved, or both. Plates over 2 in. [50 mm] in
thickness must be normalized.
d) Inspection and Tests: The test specimens must conform to the requirements shown in Table 2.
e) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this Section indicates the required variations and conformance:
46) SA-302/SA-302M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-
Molybdenum and Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel:
This specification covers manganese-molybdenum and manganese-molybdenum-nickel alloy steel

plates intended particularly for welded boilers and other pressure vessels. Plates under this specifi-
cation are available in four grades having different strength levels as follows:

Grade Type Carbon, Mn Mo Ni Tensile Strength,

max. % % % % min. ksi - MPa
A Mn-Mo 0.20 0.951.30 0.410.64 7595 [515655]
B Mn-Mo 0.20 1.151.50 0.410.64 80100 [550690]
C Mn-Mo-Ni 0.20 1.151.50 0.410.64 0.400.70 80100 [550690]
D Mn-Mo-Ni 0.20 1.151.50 0.410.64 0.701.00 80100 [550690]
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel is killed and must conform to the fine grain size require-
ments of the specification A 20/A 20M. Coils are excluded from this qualification, until the coils are
b) Chemical Analysis: The heat analysis must conform to the requirements shown in Table 1 of
this Section, unless otherwise modified in accordance with Supplementary Requirement S17, Vacu-
um Carbon-Deoxidized Steel in specification A 20/A 20M.
c) Heat Treatment: Plates 2 in. [50 mm] and under in thickness are normally supplied in the rolled
condition. Plates may be ordered normalized or stress relieved, or both. Plates over 2 in. [50 mm] in
thickness must be normalized.
d) Inspection and Tests: The test specimens must conform to the requirements shown in Table 2.
e) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this Section indicates the required variations and conformance:
47) SA-307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 psi Tensile Strength:
This specification covers the chemical and mechanical requirements of three grades of carbon steel
bolts and studs, in sizes 1/4 in. through 4 in. The fasteners are designated by Grade denoting the
tensile strength of the bolts. The materials and tests covered by SA-307 are:
A 563 - Specification for Carbons and Alloy Steel Nuts;

A 706/A 706M - Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement;
D 3951 - Practice for Commercial Packaging;
F 606 - Test Methods for Determining the Mechanical Properties of Externally and Internally Threaded Fas-
teners, Washers, Direct Tension Indicators, and Rivets;
F 1470 - Guide for Fastener Sampling for Specified Mechanical Properties and Performance Inspection
F 1554 - Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength;
F 1789 - Terminology for F16 Mechanical Fasteners;
F 2329 - Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts,
Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners;
ASME/ANSI B 1.1 - Unified Screw Threads;
ASME/ANSI B 18.2.1 - Square and Hex Bolts and Screws;
ASME/ANSI B 18.24 - Part Identifying Number (PIN) Code System;

Note 1: Grade A Bolts and studs with a minimum tensile strength of 60 ksi are intended for general
applications, Grade B Bolts and studs with a tensile strength of 60 to 100 ksi are intended for
flanged joints in piping systems with cast iron flanges, Grade C was replaced by specification F
1554 Gr. 36.
Note 2: Suitable nuts are covered in Specification A 563. The term studs, includes stud stock some-
times referred to as threaded rod. This specification does not cover requirements for machine
screws; thread cutting/forming screws, mechanical expansion anchors or similar threaded fasteners.
a) Materials and Manufacture: Steel for bolts and studs are made by the open hearth, basic-
oxygen, or electric-furnace process. The bolts can be produced by hot or cold forging of the heads
or machined from bar stocks.
b) Chemical Analysis: Grade A and B bolts and studs shall have a heat analysis conforming to the
requirements specified in Table 1. Bismuth, selenium, tellurium, or lead intentionally added cannot
be permitted for Grade B bolts and studs. Chemical analyses can be performed in accordance with
Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751.
c) Heat Treatment: Bolt and stud threads can be rolled or cut. Stress relieving of hex head fasten-
ers can be at the manufacturers option.
d) Inspection and Tests: Grades A and B bolts and studs must conform to the hardness specified
in Table 2, and tested in accordance with Test Methods F 606. Standard square and hex head bolts
must be tested by the wedge tension method. Fracture tests can be in the body or threads of the
bolt, but fracture at the junction of the head and body cannot be permitted. Other headed bolts can
be tested by the axial tension method. The speed of testing for the tensile strength tests must be a
maximum of 1in. /min. The number of tests for each lot can be as follows:
Lot of Pieces Number of Samples
800 and under 1

801 to 8 000 2
8 001 to 22 000 3
Over 22 000 5
Bolts and studs 1 1/2 in. in diameter or less, must be tested full size conform to the requirements in
Table 3. When the length of the bolt makes full-size testing impractical, machined specimens can be
tested conform to the requirements in Table 4. Bolts and studs less than three diameters in length or
undersize heads are not subject to tensile tests. All tests and inspections, required by a specification
and requested by the purchasers representative, must be made before shipment. Nonconforming
lots can be in accordance with Guide F 1470.
Zinc Coatings, Hot-Dip: When hot-dip is specified, the fasteners must be zinc-coated by the hot-
dip process in accordance with the requirements of Specification F 2329. When the fasteners are
zinc-coated by the mechanical-deposition, the process must be in accordance with the requirements
of Class 55 of Specification B 695. Threaded components (bolts and nuts) must be coated by the
same zinc-coating process, and a mixed process in a lot is not permitted.

e) Dimensions: Grade A and Grade B hex bolts must have dimensions as given in the latest issue
of ASME B18.2.1. The threads must be the Coarse Thread Series, as specified in the latest issue of
ASME B1.1, with a Class tolerance of 2A. Bolts and studs to be used with nuts or tapped holes,
must follow the specification A 563, with Class 2A tolerance, and the threads must be gaged before
hot-dip or mechanically deposited zinc coating. After zinc coating the maximum limit of pitch and
major diameter cannot exceed the Class 2A tolerance by more than the following amounts:
Diameter, in. Limit, in.

1/4 0.016
5/16, 3/8 0.017
7/16, 1/2 0.018
9/16 to 3/4 0.020
7/8 0.022
1.0 to 1 1/4 0.024
1 3/8, 1 1/2 0.027
1 3/4 to 4.0 0.050
Note: The gaging limits for bolts and studs must be verified during manufacture by assembly of a
nut, tapped as nearly as practical to the amount oversize shown above. In case of dispute, a cali-
brated thread ring gage of that same size (Class X tolerance, gage tolerance plus) can be used, per-
formed with the quality described in Table 5.
f) Marking: All bolt heads and studs 3/8 in. and larger, and studs less than 3/8 in. must be marked
with a grade marking located on the top of the bolt head or stud, as follows:
Grade Marking
A 307A
B 307B
g) Packaging and Package Marking: Must be in accordance with Practice D 3951, and when spe-
cial packaging requirements are required, can be defined at the time of the purchase order, plainly
marked with the following information: ASTM grade; Size; Name or trademark of the manufacturer;
Number of pieces; Purchase order number; Country or State of origin.
h) Manufacturing Tables: Next, required variations and conformance: Table 1, Chemical require-
ments; Table 2, Hardness requirements; Table 3, Tensile requirements, Table 4, Tensile require-
ments for machined specimens; Table 5, Hot-Dip or Mechanically deposition of zinc-coatings. Sup-
plementary requirements: S1. Bolts Suitable for Welding; S1.5 Chemical Requirements; S1.5.2 Car-
bon Equivalent; S2. Grade and Manufacturers specification, replaced by Specification F 1554.
48) SA-311/SA-311M Specification for Cold-Drawn, Stress-Relieved Carbon Steel Bars,

Subject to Mechanical Property Requirements:
This specification covers two classes, nine grades, and four conditions of stress-relieved cold-drawn
carbon steel bars produced to mechanical property requirements. One class, B, is cold drawn with

higher than normal (heavy) drafts to provide higher strength levels and four grades provide im-
proved machinability. The materials and tests covered by SA-311 are:
A 29 /A 29M - Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought and Cold-Finished, General Re-
quirements;
A 108 - Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished;
The bars are furnished in the following classes and grades, as shown below:
Class A: Normal-draft cold-drawn and stress-relieved rounds, squares, hexagons, and flats:
Grades UNS Designations
1018 G10180
1035 G10350
1045 G10450
1050 G10500
1541 G15410
1117 G11170
1137 G11370
1141 G11410
1144 G11440
Class B: Heavy-draft cold-drawn and stress-relieved rounds and hexagons:
Grades UNS Designations
1045 G10450
1050 G10500
1541 G15410
1141 G11410
1144 G11440
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steels are made by open-hearth, basic-oxygen, or electric-
furnace, and the primary melting may incorporate separate degassing or refining followed by a sec-
ondary melting using electroslag remelting or vacuum arc remelting, defined as all of the ingots re-
melted from a single primary heat. Class A bars are cold drawn by normal drafting practices. Class
B bars are cold drawn using heavy (higher than normal) drafting practices.
c) Heat Treatment: After cold drawing, the bars must be stress relieved at a temperature of not less
than 550F [288C] to meet the mechanical requirements specified. The bars are furnished cold
drawn and stress relieved, as specified.

d) Inspection and Tests: At least one tension test must be made on each lot of 25 tons or less of
the same size of each heat, and treated in the same cycle. Tension tests are made in accordance
with Test Methods and Definitions A 370. The yield strength can be determined at 0.2% offset or at
0.005 in. /in. [0.005 mm/mm] of gage length, under load.
Table 1, Chemical requirements; Table 2, Tensile requirements. Supplementary requirements: S1.
Special Surface, S2. Restricted Cast or Heat Analysis, S3. Restricted Decarburization, S4. Nonmet-
allic Inclusion Requirements (Microscopical), S5. Restricted Incidental Elements, S6. Grain Size.
Note: A typical ordering description is as follows: Hydraulic cylinder piston rods, 10,000 lb carbon steel bars,
cold drawn, stress relieved turned and polished, round 2.0 in. (50.8 mm) diameter, 10 to 12 ft (3048 to 3658
mm) long, Class B, Grade 1050, (UNS G10500), fine grain, test reports required, ASME/ASTM A 311/A 311M.
49) SA-312/SA-312M Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel
Pipes:
This specification covers seamless, straight-seam welded, and heavily cold worked welded austeni-
tic stainless steel pipe intended for high-temperature and general corrosive service. This specifica-
tion covers several grades of welded austenitic stainless pipes, such as, TP304 (S30400), TP304L
(S30403), TP304N (S30451), TP316 (S31600), TP316L (S31603), TPXM-19 (S20910), TPXM-10
(S21900 90), TPXM-11 (S21904), etc. The materials and tests covered by SA-312 are:
A 999/A 999M - Specification for General Requirements for Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe;
E 527 - Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS);
ASME/ANSI B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose;
ASME/ANSI B36.10 - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe;
ASME/ANSI B36.19 - Stainless Steel Pipe;
ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code;
AWS A5.9 - Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Steel Welding Rods and Electrodes;
ASNT SNT-TC-1A - Personnel Qualification and Certification in Nondestructive Testing.
Obs.: See similar specification, SA-249/SA-249M.
a) Materials and Manufacture: Pipes are manufactured hot finished or cold finished, at the option
of the manufacturer, according to specification A 999/A 999 M requirements. Seamless (SML) pipes
are made by a process that does not involve welding at any stage of production. Welded (WLD)
pipes are made using an automatic welding process with no addition of filler metal during the weld-
ing process. Heavily cold-worked (HCW) pipes are made by applying cold working of not less than
35% reduction in wall thickness in welded pipes, prior the final annealing. No filler can be used in
making the weld.

The welded WLD pipes are manufactured from flat rolled-steel by an automatic welding process with
no addition of filler metal. Cold worked (HCW) tubes are made by applying cold working of not less
than 35% reduction in both walls. The welded WLD and HCW pipes of NPS 14 and larger have a
single longitudinal weld. All weld tests, examinations, inspections, or treatments shall be performed
on each weld seam.
b) Chemical Analysis: The steel must conform to the requirements shown in Table 1.
c) Heat Treatment: All pipes are furnished in the heat-treated condition. Other than for Grades
S33228, S30815, S31272 and the H grades, seamless pipes, immediately followed by hot forming,
may be quenched in water or rapidly cooled, since the temperature after hot forming is not less than
the minimum specified solution treatment temperature. For H Grades, as well as Grades S33228,
S30815, and S31272, the pipes are reheated to the specified solution treatment temperature for the
required time before quenching.
Note: The grain size of Grade UNS S32615, must be No. 3 or finer. Grain size of grades TP309H,
TP309HCb, TP310H and TP310HCb, must be No. 6 or coarser, and grain size of grades 304H,
316H, 321H, 347H, and 348H, must be No. 7 or coarser, in accordance with Test Methods E 112.
d) Inspection and Tests: For pipes heat treated in a batch-type furnace, flattening tests can be
made on 5% of the pipe from each lot. For pipes heat treated by the continuous process, or direct
quenching after hot forming, this test can be made on 5% of the lot, but in no case less than two
lengths of pipe. For welded pipes, a transverse-guided face bend weld test may be conducted in-
stead of a flattening test, in accordance with Test Methods A 370. The ductility of the weld is con-
sidered acceptable when there is no evidence of cracks in the weld or between the weld and the
base metal after bending.
Note: Transverse or longitudinal tension tests can be made on specimens from two tubes for lots of
100 pipes. All sizes from NPS 1/8 to NPS 8 are available in a length up to 24 ft., with a permissible
range of 15 to 24 ft.
duce in the pipe wall a stress of 60% of the specified minimum yield point, at room temperature. All
pipes are subject to the hydrostatic test or nondestructive electric test, in accordance with specifica-
tion A 999/A 999M for pipes or Specification A 450/A 450M for tubes. Pipes furnished without the
manufacturers hydrostatic test must include the mandatory markings; the letters NH, and ET when
Eddy-Current Testing is performed, or UT when Ultrasonic Testing is performed.
f) Repair by Welding: For welded pipe whose diameter equals or exceeds NPS 6, and the wall
thickness is 0.200 or thicker, weld repairs can be made, according to section on Repair by Welding

of Specification A 999/A 999M, since the weld repairs do not exceed 20% of the seam length. Weld
repairs must be made only with the gas tungsten-arc welding process, using the same classification
of bare filler rods, AWS specification A 5.9.
g) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this Section indicates the required variations, and chemical ele-
ments permitted. Table 1, Chemical requirements; Table 2, Annealing requirements; Table 3, Varia-
tions in wall thickness; Table 4, Tensile requirements; Table 5, Pipe and filler metal specification.
The supplementary requirements are: S1. Product Analysis; S2. Transverse Tension Tests; S3.
Flattening Test; S4. Etching Tests; S5. Radiographic Examination; S6. Stabilizing Heat Treatment;
S7. Intergranular Corrosion Test; S8. Minimum Wall Pipe; S9. Weld Decay Test. Appendix: Dimen-
sions of welded and seamless steel pipes, Sch. 5SA, Sch. 10SA, Sch. 40S and Sch. 80S.
50) SA-320/SA-320M Specification for Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials
for Low Temperature Service:
This specification covers alloy steel bolting materials for pressure vessels, valves, flanges, and fit-
tings for low-temperature service, and covers rolled, forged, or strain hardened bars, bolts, screws,
studs, and stud bolts. Austenitic stainless steels may be solution annealed or annealed and strain-
hardened. Several grades are covered, including both ferritic (L7, L7M, L70, etc.) and austenitic
steels (B8, B8A, etc.), as shown below:
Grade Type Chemical Tensile Strength, Hardness,

Composition min. max.
L7, L7M, L70 Cr-Mo
L7A, L71 C-Mo (AISI 4037) Quenched and
L7B, L72 Ferritic Cr-Mo (AISI 4137) tempered
125 ksi [860 MPa]
L7C, L73 Steels Ni-Cr-Mo (AISI 8740) 235 HB
L43 Ni-Cr-Mo (AISI 4340) or 99 HRB
L1 Low-Carbon Boron
B8, B8A S30400 (AISI 304)
Carbide solution
B8C, B8CA S34700 (AISI 347)
treated
B8T, B8TA S32100 (AISI 321)
Austenitic 223 HB
B8P, B8PA S30500
Steels, 75 125 ksi or 96 HRB
B8F, B8FA S30300 (AISI 303)
Classes 1, [515 860 MPa] to
B8M, B8MA S30323 (AISI 303 Se)
1A, and 2 321 HB
B8LN, B8LNA S31600 (AISI 316)
or 35
B8LN, B8LNA S30453 HRC
B8MLN, B8MLNA S31653
Obs.: The bars are hot wrought, and may be processed by centerless grinding or cold drawing.
Service, or Both;
E 566 - Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Sorting of Ferrous Metals;
F 436 - Specification for Hardened Steel Washers;

ASME/ANSI B1.1 Screw Threads;
ASME/ANSI B18.22.1 Plain Washers.
a) Materials and Manufacture: Steel for bolts and studs are made by the open hearth, basic-oxy-
gen, or electric-furnace process, and must conform to the requirements of specification A 962/A
962M, which include methods, finish, thread dimensions, marking certification, and optional supple-
mentary requirements.
b) Chemical Analysis: Each alloy must conform to the requirements prescribed in Table 4.
c) Heat Treatment: The bolting materials must be cooled to room temperature after rolling or forg-
ing. Grades L7, L7A, L7B, L7C, L7M, L43, L1, L70, L71, L72, and L73 must be reheated to above
the upper critical temperature and then liquid quenched and tempered. Grades B8, B8C, B8M, B8T,
B8F, B8P, B8LN, and B8MLN must receive a carbide solution treatment, described as Class 1.
When increased mechanical properties are desired, the austenitic materials can be solution an-
nealed and strain hardened, when specified, identified as Class 2. For L7M bolting, the final heat
treatment, may be the tempering or stress-relieving operation at 1,150F 620C] minimum, done af-
ter machining or rolling of the threads and any type of cutting. The coolant temperature for chilling
the test specimens must be controlled within 3F [1.5C].
d) Inspection and Tests: One tension test and one impact test with three specimens can be made
for each diameter of heat-treated bars, ach charge defined as 6,000 lb [2,700 kg]. For studs, bolts,
screws, etc., one tension test and one set of three impact specimens can be made for each diam e-
ter of each heat involved in the lot. Each lot shall consist of the following:
Diameter, in. [mm] Lot Size, lb [kg]
1 1/8 [30] and under: 1,500 [680] or a fraction;

Over 1 1/8 [30] to 1 3/4 [45]: 4,500 [2040] or a fraction;
Over 1 3/4 [45] to 2 1/2 [65]: 6,000 [2700] or a fraction;
Over 2 1/2 [65]: 100 pieces or a fraction;
Austenitic steels Class 1, 1A and 2 for temperatures above 325F [200C]; austenitic steel Class
1 and 1A Grades B8, B8A, B8P, B8PA, B8C, B8CA, B8LN, and B8LNA for temperatures above
425F [255C]; and ferritic or austenitic bolting heat-treated bars, screws, studs, and stud bolts,
1/2 in. [12.5 mm] and smaller are not required impact testing, unless the Supplementary Require-
ment S1 is specified in the purchase order.
The maximum hardness of Grade L7M must be 235 HB or 99 HRB. The minimum hardness cannot
be less than 200 HB or 93 HRB. As an alternative, the use of 100% electromagnetic testing for in-
dentation hardness testing is permissible, in accordance with Practice E 566, using a random sam-
ple of a minimum of 100 pieces in each purchase lot, however the tension tests must prevail over all
hardness readings.

Headed fasteners diameter 1 1/2 in. and smaller, with body length three times the diameter or long-
er, produced by upsetting or forging (hot or cold) are subjected to full size testing, and must show no
failure, or indications of failure, such as cracks, at the junction of the head and shank. The headed
fasteners must be wedge tested full size in accordance with Annex A3 of Test Methods and Defini-
tions A 370. The minimum full size breaking strength (lbf) for individual sizes can be as follows:
Ts = UTS x As = As = 0.785 [D (0.974/n)] =
Where: Where:
Ts = Wedge tensile strength; D = Nominal thread size;

UTS = Tensile strength; n = Number of threads per inch.
As = Stress area, square inches, calculated as follows:
e) Nuts and Washers: Bolts and stud bolts Grades L7, L7A, L7B, L7C, L43, L1, L70, L71, L72, and
L73 must have ferritic alloy nuts conforming to Grade 4 or Grade 7 of specification A 194/A 194M.
Grade L7M bolts and stud bolts must have Grade 7M nuts, with a hardness not exceeding 235 HB.
All nut materials must be subject to the impact requirements with test specimens taken from bars or
plates from the steel used for manufacturing the nuts, and heat treated with the nut blanks.
Bolts and stud bolts of Grades B8, B8C, B8T, B8P, B8F, B8M, B8LN, and B8MLN must have aus-
tenitic alloy nuts conforming to Grades 8, 8C, 8T, 8F, 8M, 8LN, and 8MLN also conforming to speci-
fication A 194/A 194M. Impact tests are not required for Grades 8F, 8M, 8T, and 8MLN for tempera-
tures above 325F [200C] and for Grades 8, 8P, 8C, and 8LN above 425F [255C].
Washers for use with ferritic steel bolting must conform to specification F 436. Washers for use with
austenitic steel bolting must also be made of austenitic steel, and all dimensions in accordance with
requirements of ASME/ANSI B18.22.1.
f) Threads: Where practical, all threads must be formed after all heat treatments. Bolts and stud
bolts Grades B8A, B8CA, B8MA, B8PA, B8FA, B8TA, B8LNA, and B8MLNA and Class 1A, are to
be solution-treated in the finished condition.
Note: The gaging limits for bolts and studs must be verified during manufacture by assembly of a
nut, tapped as nearly as practical to the amount oversize shown above. In case of dispute, a cali-
brated thread ring gage of that same size (Class X tolerance, gage tolerance plus) can be used.
g) Packaging and Package Markings: Must be in accordance with Practice D 3951, and when
special packaging requirements are required, can be defined at the time of the purchase order,
plainly marked with the following information: Grade; Size; Name or trademark of the manufacturer;
Number of pieces; Purchase order number; Country or State of origin.
Class 2, Grades B8, B8C, B8M, B8P, B8F, and B8T strain hardened. A line must be stamped under
the grade symbol in order to distinguish it from Class 1 and Class 1A bolting, which has not been
strain hardened. For Class 1A, the markings B8A, B8CA, B8MA, B8PA, B8FA, B8TA, B8LNA, and
B8MLNA identifies a solution-treated material in the finished state.

Grade L7M must have a line under the grade symbol to distinguish it from L7M, not required for
100% hardness testing. Bolting materials, including threaded bars, must be furnished bundled and
tagged or boxed, with the material grade symbol and the manufacturers identification name. Nuts
from materials that have been impact tested must be marked with the letter L.
h) Manufacturing Tables: Next, required variations and conformance: Table 1, Mechanical re-
quirements; Table 2, Impact energy requirements; Table 3, Recommended test temperature; Table
4, Chemical requirements. Supplementary requirements: S1. Impact Properties; S2. Lateral Expan-
sion; S3. Hardness Testing of Class 2 Bolting Materials for ASME Applications.
51) SA-325 Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat-Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum
Tensile Strength:
This specification covers two types of quenched and tempered steel heavy hex structural bolts hav-
ing a minimum tensile strength of 120 ksi for sizes 1.0 in. and less, and 105 ksi for sizes over 1.0 to
1 1/2 in., intended for use in structural connections. These connections are covered under the re-
quirements of the Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts, approved by
the Research Council on Structural Connections, endorsed by the American Institute of Steel Con-
struction and the Industrial Fastener Institute.
This specification is applicable to heavy hex structural bolts. These bolts are furnished in sizes 1/2
to 1 1/2 in., inclusive, (for bolts of other dimensions and thread lengths with similar mechanical pro-
perties, refer to specification A 449). Type and basic chemical composition, as follows:
Type Description
Type 1: Medium carbon, carbon boron, or medium carbon alloy steels;

Type 2: Withdrawn (November 1991);
Type 3: Weathering steels.
Note: Bolts for general applications, including anchor bolts, quenched and tempered steel bolts and
studs with diameters greater than 1 1/2 in., are covered by specification A 449, with similar mechan-
ical properties.
Service, or Both;
A 449 - Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum
Tensile Strength, General Use;
A 490 - Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength;
F 788/F 788M - Specification for Surface Discontinuities of Bolts, Screws, and Studs, Inch and Metric Series;
F 959 Specif. for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners;

F 1470 - Guide for Fastener Sampling for Specified Mechanical Properties and Performance Inspection;
G 101 - Guide for Estimating the Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance of Low-Alloy Steels;
ASME/ANSI B1.1 - Unified Screw Threads;
ASME/ANSI B18.2.6 - Fasteners for Use in Structural Applications;
ASME/ANSI B18.24 - Part Identification Number (PIN) Code System Standard for B18 Fastener Products.
a) Materials and Manufacture: Steel for bolts and studs are made by the open hearth, basic-oxy-
gen, or electric-furnace process, and must conform to the requirements of specification A 962/A
962M, which include methods, finish, thread dimensions, marking certification, and optional supple-
mentary requirements.
b) Chemical Analysis: Type 1 bolts are plain carbon steel, carbon boron steel, alloy steel or alloy
boron steel at the manufacturers option, according to the chemical composition specified in Table 1.
Type 3 bolts are weathering steels conform to one of the chemical compositions specified in Table 2
of this Section. The selection of the chemical composition, A, B, C, D, E, or F, may be according to
the option of the bolt manufacturer. Heats of steel to which bismuth, selenium, tellurium, or lead has
been intentionally added, are permitted.
c) Heat Treatment: Type 1 bolts produced from medium carbon steel to which chromium, nickel,
molybdenum, or boron were intentionally added, must be quenched only in oil from the austenitizing
temperature. Type 3 bolts must be quenched only in oil from the austenitizing temperature.
d) Inspection and Tests: Bolts sizes 1.00 in. and smaller having a length of 2 1/4 D and longer,
and sizes larger than 1.00 in. having a length of 3D and longer, must be wedge tested full size. Siz-
es 1.00 in. and smaller having a length shorter than 2 1/4 D and down to 2D that cannot be wedge
tensile tested, must be axially tension tested. The rotational capacity test is intended to evaluate the
efficiency of the lubricant.
The bolt and nut test can be considered as non-conforming if the assembly fails to pass any one of
the following specified requirements: inability to install the assembly to the nut rotation, inability to
remove the nut after installing, shear failure of the threads determined by visual examination. In
case of dispute, a calibrated thread ring gage (Class X tolerance, gage tolerance plus) must be
used to verify compliance.
Note: Evaluation of the surface discontinuities, quench cracks, forging cracks, head bursts, shear
bursts, seams, folds, thread laps, voids, tool marks, nicks, and gouges shall be in accordance with
Specification F 788/F 788M. Tensile, proof load and hardness tests must be conducted in accord-
ance with Test Methods F 606, and must not show signs of failure if subjected to the nut rotation.
When hot-dip is specified, and when no preference is specified, the fasteners must be zinc-coated
by the hot-dip process conform to the requirements of specification F 2329. When zinc-coated nuts
are ordered with the bolts, the nuts must be lubricated in accordance with specification A 563, to
minimize galling. When mechanically deposited is specified, the fasteners must be conform to re-
quirements of Class 55 of Specification B 695.

e) Dimensions: The bolts must conform to the dimensions for heavy hex structural bolts specified in
ASME B18.2.6. Threads are the Unified Coarse Thread Series as specified in ASME B1.1, e Class
2A tolerances. After zinc coating, the maximum limits of pitch and major diameter must not exceed
the Class 2A limit by more than the following amounts:
Nominal Bolt Diameter (in.) Hot Dip Zinc Mechanical Zinc
1/2 0.018 0.012

9/16, 5/8, 3/4 0.020 0.013
7/8 0.022 0.015
1 to 1 1/4 0.024 0.016
1 3/8, 1 1/2 0.027 0.018
The minimum number of tests from each lot for the tests specified below must be as follows:
Tests Number of Tests in accordance with Guide F 1470:
Hardness, tensile strength, proof Referenced coating specification: Specification

load and rotational capacity; F 788/F 788M.
Coating weight/thickness;
Surface discontinuities;
Dimensions and thread fit; ASME B18.2.6.
f) Identification of Materials: Type 1 bolts must be marked A 325. Type 3 bolts must be marked
A 325 with the A 325 underlined, with additional distinguishing marks to indicate that the bolts are
weathering steel, may be at the manufacturers option.
g) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this section indicates the required variations, and chemical el e-
ments permitted. Table 1, Chemical requirements for Type 1, Table 2 Chemical requirements for
Type 3, Table 3, Hardness requirements; Table 4, Tensile requirements; Table 5, Tensile require-
ments for machined specimens; Table 6, Rotational capacity test. Supplementary Requirements:
S1. Bolts Threaded Full Length.
52) SA-333/333M Specification for Seamless and Welded Steel Pipe for Low-Tem-
perature Service:
This specification covers nominal wall seamless and welded carbon and alloy steel pipe intended for
use at low temperatures. Some pipes sizes may not be available under this specification because
heavier wall thicknesses have an adverse effect on low-temperature impact properties. The Grades
of ferritic steels covered by this specification are Grades 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 and 11 according to
chemical composition. The materials and tests covered by SA-333 are:
A 671 - Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for Atmospheric and Lower Temperatures;
E 23 - Test Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of Metallic Materials.

a) Materials and Manufacture: Seamless pipes are made by a process that does not involve weld-
ing at any stage of production. Welded pipes are made using an automatic welding process with no
addition of filler metal during the welding process. Only the Grade 4 pipes are made by the seam-
less process. All pipes grades must be also according to specification A 999/A 999M requirements.
Note: For electric-fusion-welded pipe, with filler metal added, see Specification A 671.
Grade Type Carbon, Cr Ni Mo Tensile Strength,

max. % % % % min. psi - MPa
Grade 1 0.30 55 000 [380]
Grade 3 Ni 0.19 3.18-3.82 65 000 [450]
Grade 4 Cr - Ni 0.12 0.44-1.01 0.47-0.98 60 000 [415]
Grade 6 0.30 60 000 [415]
Grade 7 Ni 0.19 2.03-2.57 65 000 [450]
Grade 8 Ni 0.13 8.40-9.60 100 000 [690]
Grade 9 Ni 0.20 1.60-2.24 63 000 [435]
Grade 10 Cr-Ni-Mo 0.20 0.15 max. 0.25 max. 0.05 max. 80 000 [550]
Grade 11 Cr-Ni-Mo 0.10 0.50 max. 35.0-37.0 0.50 max. 65 000 [450]
position prescribed in Table 1. For Grades 1, 6, or 10 the addition of any element other than those
listed for the ordered grade is not permitted. However, the addition of elements required for
deoxidation of the steel is permitted.
c) Heat Treatment: All seamless and welded pipe, different from Grades 8 and 11, must be treated
to control the microstructure in accordance with one of the following methods: Normalize by heating
to a uniform temperature of not less than 1,500F [815C] and cool in air or in an atmosphere con-
trolled furnace. For the seamless process only, reheat operation can be to a temperature range from
1,550 to 1,750F [845 to 945C] and cool in air or in a controlled atmosphere furnace from an initial
temperature of not less than 1550F [845C].
Seamless pipe of Grades 1, 6, and 10 may be heat treated by heating to a temperature not less
than 1,500F [815C], followed by quenching in liquid and reheating to a suitable tempering temper-
ature. Grade 8 pipe may be heat treated to a temperature of 1475 25F [800 15C], reheat within
the range from 1,050 to 1,125F [565 to 605C]. When Grade 11 pipe is annealed, it must be nor-
malized in the range of 1,400 to 1,600F [760 to 870C].
d) Inspection and Tests: For pipes heat treated in a batch-type furnace, transverse or longitudinal
tensile tests and flattening tests can be made on 5% of the pipe from each lot. For pipes heat treat-
ed by the continuous process, these tests can be made on 5% from each lot, but in no case less
than 2 pipes. For welded pipes, a transverse-guided face bend weld test may be conducted instead
of a flattening test, in accordance with Test Methods A 370. The ductility of the weld is considered
acceptable when there are no cracks or failures between the weld and the base metal after bending.
When Charpy impact tests are specified the test temperature for Grades 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, and 10 must
be lower than the minimum temperature shown in Table 5 for the respective grade. Impact tests
specified for temperatures lower than 70F [20C] should be measured with thermocouples, ther-

mometers, or any other suitable devices, and controlled within 3F [2C]. The specimens are quickly
transferred from the cooling device to the anvil of the Charpy impact testing machine, and broken
with a time lapse of not more than 5s.
e) Hydrostatic Tests: Each pipe can be subjected to the hydrostatic test or nondestructive electric
test, in accordance with specification A 999/A 999M. If the test signals were produced by visual im-
perfections such as, scratches, surface roughness, dings, cutting chips, etc., the pipes may be ac-
cepted, since that these imperfection are less than 0.004 in. (0.1 mm) or 12.5% of the specified wall
thickness (whichever is greater).
ments permitted. Table 1, Chemical requirements; Table 2, Stress relieving requirements; Table 3,
Tensile requirements; Table 4, Impact requirements for Grades 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, and 10; Table 5, Im-
pact temperatures; Table 6, Impact temperature reduction. Supplementary requirements: S1.
Subsize Impact Specimens.
53) SA-334/334M Specification for Seamless and Welded Carbon and Alloy-Steel Tubes
for Low-Temperature Service:
This specification covers several grades of minimum wall-thickness, seamless and welded, carbon
and alloy-steel tubes intended for use at low temperatures. Some product sizes may not be availa-
ble under this specification because heavier wall thicknesses have an adverse effect on low -
temperature impact properties. The materials and tests covered by SA-334 are:
E 23 - Test Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of Metallic Materials.
a) Materials and Manufacture: Tubes must be made by the seamless or automatic welding pro-
cess with no addition of filler metal in the welding operation. All tubes must be also according to spe-
cification A 1016/A 1016M requirements.
Grade Type Carbon, Cr Ni Mo Tensile Strength, Hardness

max. % % % % min. psi - MPa HB max.
Grade 1 0.30 55 000 [380] 163
Grade 3 Ni 0.19 3.18-3.82 65 000 [450]
Grade 6 0.30 60 000 [415] 190
Grade 7 Ni 0.19 2.03-2.57 65 000 [450] 190
Grade 8 Ni 0.13 8.40-9.60 100 000 [690] 190
Grade 9 Ni 0.20 1.60-2.24 63 000 [435]
Grade 11 Cr-Ni-Mo 0.10 0.50 max. 35.0-37.0 0.50 max. 65 000 [450] 190
position prescribed in Table 1. For Grades 1 or 6 the addition of any element other than those listed
for the ordered grade is not permitted. However, the addition of elements required for deoxidation of
the steel is permitted.

c) Heat Treatment: All seamless and welded pipe, different from Grades 8 and 11, must be treated
to control the microstructure in accordance with one of the following methods: Normalize by heating
to a uniform temperature of not less than 1,500F [815C] and cool in air or in an atmosphere con-
trolled furnace. For the seamless process only, reheat operation can be to a temperature range from
1,550 to 1,750F [845 to 945C] and cool in air or in a controlled atmosphere furnace from an initial
temperature of not less than 1,550F [845C].
Seamless pipe of Grades 1, 6, may be heat treated by heating to a temperature not less than
1,500F [815C], followed by quenching in liquid and reheating to a suitable tempering temperature.
Grade 8 pipe may be heat treated to a temperature of 1475 25F [800 15C], reheat within the
range from 1,050 to 1,125F [565 to 605C]. When Grade 11 pipe is annealed, it must be normal-
ized in the range of 1,400 to 1,600F [760 to 870C].
tubes, and for more than 50 tubes tension tests can be made on specimens from two tubes. One
flattening test, one flare test and one flange test must be made on specimens from each end of one
finished tube. For welded tubes, one reverse flattening test must be made on a specimen from each
1500 ft [460 m] of finished tubing.
Brinell or Rockwell hardness tests must be made on specimens from two tubes from each lot. One
notched-bar impact test, consisting of three specimens, can be made from each heat, for only tubes
from the same heat, which have wall thicknesses not exceeding by more than wall thicknesses 1/4
in. [6.3 mm], in accordance with Test Methods E 23. When testing welds the specimen must be,
whenever diameter and thickness permits, transverse to the longitudinal axis of the tube in the
welded joint, and perpendicular to the surface.
Impact tests specified for temperatures lower than 70F [20C] should be measured with therm o-
couples, thermometers, or any other suitable devices, and controlled within 3F [2C]. The speci-
mens are quickly transferred from the cooling device to the anvil of the Charpy impact testing ma-
chine, and broken with a time lapse of not more than 5s.
test, in accordance with specification A 1016/A 1016M, at the option of the manufacturer. The mark-
ing can include hot-finished, cold-drawn, seamless, or welded, with the letters LT followed by the
temperature at which the impact tests were made.
ments permitted. Table 1, Chemical requirements; Table 2, Heat-treatment requirements; Table 3,
Tensile requirements; Table 4, Maximum hardness; Table 5, Impact requirements for Grades 1, 3,
6, 7, and 9; Table 6, Impact temperatures; Table 7, Impact temperature reduction. Supplementary
requirements: S1. Nonstandard Test Specimens.
54) SA-335/335M Specification for Seamless Ferritic Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Tempe-
rature Service:
This specification covers nominal wall and minimum wall seamless ferritic alloy-steel pipes to be u-

sed for high-temperature services. Pipes ordered to this specification must be suitable for bending,
flanging, forming operations, and for fusion welding. Several grades of ferritic steels are covered by
this specification such as, P1, P2, P5, etc. The materials and tests covered by SA-335 are:
E 527 - Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys in the Unified Numbering System (UNS);
ASME/ANSI B36.10M - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe;
ASME SNT-TC-1A - Recommended Practice for Nondestructive Personnel Qualification and Certification.
a) Materials and Manufacture: Pipes must be made by hot finished or cold drawn with the finishing
treatment, as required. All tubes must be also according to spe-cification A 999/A 999M require-
ments. For Grades P2 and P12 the steel can be made by coarse-grain melting practice with the
grain size or deoxidation practice.
position prescribed in Table 1. The addition of elements for deoxidation of the steel is permitted.
c) Heat Treatment: The temperature for tempering should be at least 100F [50C] above the in-
tended service temperature. All pipes must be reheated for heat treatment and heat treated in ac-
cordance with the requirements of Table 2.
d) Inspection and Tests: Tensile properties must conform to the requirements shown in Table 3.
Pipes of Grades P91, P92, P911, P122, and P36 must have a hardness not exceeding 250 HB/265
HV [25 HRC] and pipes Grade P23 cannot exceed a hardness of 220 HB. The computed minimum
elongation values for each 1/32 in. [0.8 mm] decrease in wall thickness. The pipe grades are:
Grade Type Carbon, Cr Mo Tensile Strength,

max. % % % min. psi - MPa
P1 K11522 0.100.20 0.440.65 55 000 [380]
P2 K11547 0.100.20 0.500.81 0.440.65 55 000 [380]
P5 K41545 0.15 max. 4.006.00 0.450.65 60 000 [415]
P5b K51545 0.15 max. 4.006.00 0.450.65 60 000 [415]
P5c K41245 0.12 max. 4.006.00 0.450.65 60 000 [415]
P9 S50400 0.15 max. 8.0010.00 0.901.10 60 000 [415]
P11 K1159 0.050.15 1.001.50 0.440.65 60 000 [415]
P12 K11562 0.050.15 0.801.25 0.440.65 60 000 [415]
P15 K11578 0.050.15 0.440.65 60 000 [415]
P21 K31545 0.050.15 2.653.35 0.801.06 60 000 [415]
P22 K21590 0.050.15 1.902.60 0.871.13 60 000 [415]
P23 K41650 0.040.10 1.902.60 0.050.30 74 000 [510]
For heat treated pipes in a batch-type furnace, transverse or longitudinal tension test, flattening,
hardness or bend tests can be made on 5% from each treated lot. For small lots, at least 1 pipe

must be tested. For material heat treated by the continuous process, tests can be made on a suffi-
cient number, but in no case less than 2 pipes.
Each pipe must be examined by a nondestructive examination method in accordance with Practice
E 213, Practice E 309 or Practice E 570. Ultrasonic examination can be performed to detect both
longitudinally and transversely discontinuities. The Eddy Current has the capability to detect signifi-
cant discontinuities, especially of the short abrupt type. The Flux Leakage examination is capable of
detecting the presence of significant longitudinally or transversely discontinuities.
Note: For examination by the Ultrasonic method, the minimum nominal transducer frequency must
be 2.25 MHz. For Eddy Current testing, the excitation coil frequency shall be 10 kHz, or less.
test, in accordance with specification A 999/A 999M, at the option of the manufacturer. The marking
can include hot-finished, cold-drawn, seamless, or welded, with the letters LT followed by the tem-
perature at which the impact tests were made.
f) Manufacturing Tables: Next, the required variations, and chemical elements permitted. Table 1,
Chemical requirements; Table 2, Heat-treatment requirements; Table 3, Tensile requirements; Table
4, Elongation requirements; Table 5, Minimum elongation; Table 6, Permissible Variations in Out-
side Diameter; Table 7, Permitted variations in wall thickness; Table 8, Test method information and
marking. Supplementary requirements: S1. Product Analysis; S2. Transverse Tension Tests; S3.
Flattening Test; S4. Metal Structure and Etching Tests; S5. Photomicrographs; S6. Photomicro-
graphs for Individual Pieces; S7. Alternative Heat Treatment - Grade P91.
55) SA-336/336M Specification for Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure and High-Tem-
perature Parts:
This specification covers ferritic steel forgings for boilers, pressure vessels, high-temperature parts,
and associated equipment. Forgings made of steel grades listed in Specification A 335/A 335M,
may also be ordered under this specification. The materials and tests covered by SA-336 are:
A 275/A 275M - Practice for Magnetic Particle Examination of Steel Forgings;

A 335/A 335M - Specification for Seamless Ferritic Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service;
A 965/A 965M - Specification for Steel Forgings, Austenitic, for Pressure and High Temperature Parts;
ASME Section III - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and Nuclear Facility Components;
ASME Section IX - Welding Qualifications.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel shall be made in accordance with the Melting Process
Section of Specification A 788/A 788M, forged as close as practical to the specified shape and size.
b) Chemical Analysis: The forged steel classes must be in accordance with the requirements as to
chemical composition prescribed in Table 2, in accordance with Specification A 788. The product
analysis for columbium and calcium for Grade F22V must conform to requirements of this specific a-

tion. Boron is not subject to product analysis. This specification covers four classes of materials, as
shown below:
Grade F1 F11 F11 F11 F12 F5 F5A F9 F6

Class 2 Class 3 Class 2
Tensile 75,000 60,000 70,000 60,000 80,000 85,000
70,000 70,000 85,000
Strength, 100,000 85,000 95,000 85,000 105,000 110,000
95,000 95,000 110,000
min. ksi - [515690] [415585] [485660] [415585] [550725] [585760]
MPa [485660] [485660] [585760]
Grade F21 F21 F22 F22 F3V F46 F22V F91 F911
Class 3 Class 1 Class 3 Class 1
Tensile 60,000 75,000 60,000 85,000 90,000 85,000 85,000
75,000 85,000 100,000 85,000 110,000 120,000 110,000 110,000 85,000
Strength 100,000 110,000
min. ksi [415585]
[415585] [515690] [585760] [620830] [585760] [585760]
- MPa [515690] [585760]
c) Heat Treatment: The steel forgings must be annealed or normalized and tempered but alterna-
tively may be liquid quenched and tempered. For all grades, normalizing or liquid quenching must
be followed by tempering at a subcritical temperature. Grade F22V can be normalized and tempered
or liquid quenched and tempered. The minimum austenitizing temperature can be 1650F [900C].
For all grades, the minimum tempering temperature must be 1150F [620C]. For Grades F91 and
F911 the austenitizing temperature can be in the range of 1900 to 1975F [1040 to 1080C].
d) Inspection and Tests: Conform to the requirements for mechanical properties prescribed in the
table above. The largest obtainable tension test specimen as specified in Test Methods and Defini-
tions A 370 can be used. Minimum energy absorption for the Charpy V-notch tests must meet a val-
ue of 40 ft.lbf. [54 J], commonly an average of three specimens. The impact test temperature cannot
be warmer than 0F [18C].
For quenched and tempered forgings and forged bars weighing over 5000 lb [2250 kg] to 10 000 lb
[4500 kg] at the time of heat treatment, and forged bars that exceed 12 ft [3.7 m] in length, one ten-
sion test can be taken from each forging. For quenched and tempered forgings and forged bars
weighing more than 10 000 lb [4500 kg] at the time of heat treatment, two tension test specimens
can be taken from each forging.
tion of the purchaser. The defective area must be removed and examined by a magnetic particle
method or a liquid penetrant method to ensure all defective area has been removed.
Tensile requirements; Table 2, Chemical requirements. Supplementary requirements: S1. Rough
Turning and Boring; S2. Transverse Tension Test; S3. Alternative Test Specimen Requirements;
S4. Hydrostatic Test; S6. Liquid Penetrant Examination; S7. Marking; S8. Forging Requirements;
S9. Individual Forging.

56) SA-350/350M Specification for Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel Forgings, Requiring
Notch Toughness Testing for Piping Components:
This specification covers several grades of carbon and low-alloy steel forged or ring-rolled flanges,
forged fittings and valves intended primarily for low-temperature service and requiring notch tough-
ness testing, made according to dimensional standards, such as the ASME and API Specifications.
A 961 - Specification for Common Requirements for Steel Flanges, Forged Fittings, Valves, and Parts for Pip-
ing Applications ASME B 16.5 - Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings;
ASME/ANSI B 16.9 - Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt-Welding Fittings;
ASME/ANSI B 16.10 - Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Ferrous Valves;
ASME/ANSI B 16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded;
ASME/ANSI B 16.30 Unfired Pressure Vessel Flange Dimensions;
ASME/ANSI B 16.34 Valves-Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End;
ASME/ANSI B 16.47 Large Diameter Steel Flanges;
AWS A 5.1 - Mild Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes;
AWS A 5.5 - Low-Alloy Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes;
API 600 - Steel Gate Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends;
API 602 - Compact Design Carbon Steel Gate Valves for Refinery Use;
API 605 - Large Diameter Carbon Steel Flanges.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel forgings consist of ingots, or forged, rolled, or strand cast
blooms, billets, slabs, or bars, produced by any of the following primary processes: open-hearth,
basic oxygen, electric-furnace, or vacuum-induction melting (VIM). The primary melting may incor-
porate separate degassing or refining, and may be followed by secondary melting using electroslag
remelting (ESR), or vacuum-arc remelting (VAR). The molten steel may be vacuum treated prior to
or during pouring of the ingot, and must be killed, by fine-grain practice.
Note: Except for flanges, hollow and cylindrically shaped parts may be machined from rolled bar or
seamless tubular materials. Other parts, excluding flanges, may be machined from hot-rolled or
forged bar up through and including NPS 4. Elbows, return bends, tees, and header tees cannot be
machined directly from bar stocks.

max. % min. psi - MPa
LF1 0.30 6085 [415585]
LF2 0.30 7095 [485655]
LF3 0.20 7095 [485655]
LF5 0.30. 6691 [455630]
LF6 0.22. 75100 [515690]
LF9 0.20 6388 [435605]
LF787 Class 2 6585 [450585]
0.07
LF787 Class 3 7595 [515655]

b) Chemical Analysis: The steel must be in accordance with the requirements Specification A 961
and as to chemical composition shown below. Leaded steels are not permitted.
c) Heat Treatment: After hot working and before reheating, the forgings must be cooled substantial-
ly below the transformation range. Grade LF787 must be furnished in the normalized, or in the nor-
malized and tempered, or in the quenched and tempered condition. All quenched forgings must be
tempered by reheating to a temperature between 1100F [590C] and the lower transformation tem-
perature, holding at temperature a minimum of 30 min/in. [30 min/25 mm] of maximum thickness but
in no case less than 30 min., cooling in still air.
d) Inspection and Tests: Tensile properties must conform to the requirements shown in Table 2.
The test specimen must represent all forgings from the same heat and heat-treatment load whose
maximum thicknesses do not exceed the thickness of the test forging or blank by more than 1/4 in.
[6 mm]. The notched bar impact test must be made in accordance with the procedure for the Charpy
V-notch type test as described in Test Methods and Definitions A 370. The hardness must be test-
ed to ensure that it meets the 197 HB maximum of this specification.
Note: For hydrostatic testing, forgings must be capable of passing a hydrostatic test compatible with
the rating of the finished item, conducted by the manufacturer according to specification A 961.
tion of the purchaser. Welding repairs in the normalized, normalized and tempered, or the quenched
and tempered conditions must be stress-relieved at 1100F [590C] minimum. The welded area
must be completely free of defects as verified by magnetic particle or liquid penetrant inspection.
Chemical requirements; Table 2, Tensile requirements; Table 3, Charpy V-Notch requirements; Ta-
ble 4, Standard impact test temperature; Table 5, Minimum equivalent absorbed energy ft.lbf (J);
Charpy impact test temperature reduction. Supplementary requirements: S1. Other Impact Test
Temperatures; S2. Stress-Relieved Test Specimens; S3. Lateral Expansion; S4. Vacuum Carbon-
Deoxidized Steels; S5. Special Impact Test Requirements for Flanges; S6. Carbon Equivalent.
57) SA-351/351M Specification for Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for

Pressure Containing Parts:
This specification covers austenitic and austenitic ferritic (duplex) steel castings for valves, flanges,
fittings, and other pressure-containing parts. A number of grades of austenitic and austenitic ferritic
steel castings are included in this specification, with varying degrees of suitability for service at high
temperatures or in corrosive environments such as, CF3, CF3A CF8, CF8A, CF3M, CF8M, CF3MN,
CF8C, HT30, CF10MC, CN7M, CN3MN, etc. The materials and tests covered by SA-351 are:
A 216/A 216M - Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature
Service;
A 217/A 217M - Specification for Steel Castings, Martensitic Stainless and Alloy, for Pressure-Containing
Parts, Suitable for High-Temperature Service;
A488/A 488M - Practice for Steel Castings, Welding, Qualification of Procedures and Personnel;

MSS-SP-55 - Quality Standard for Steel Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Fittings and Other Components.
Note: Carbon steel castings for pressure-containing parts are covered by specification A 216/A
216M, and low-alloy steel castings by specification A 217/A 217M.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel is made by the electric furnace process with or without
separate refining, such as argon-oxygen decarburization (AOD). Material furnished to this specifica-
tion must conform to the specification A 703/A 703M, including any supplementary requirements.
Note: Grades CE20N, CF3A, CF3MA, and CF8A are not recommended for service at temperatures
above 800F [425C] because of thermal instability, and Grade CD4MCu is not recommended for
service at temperatures above 600F [316C], because of embrittlement phases .
and as to chemical composition shown below. Leaded steels are not permitted.
c) Heat Treatment: All castings must receive a heat treatment at the temperature specified in Table
1, followed by a quench in water or rapid cooling.
d) Inspection and Tests: Steel used for the castings shall conform to the requirements as to tensile
properties prescribed in Table 3. Visual Method SP 55 or other visual standards may be used to de-
fine acceptable surface discontinuities and finish.
e) Repair by Welding: W eld repairs on castings that have leaked on hydrostatic test, or on castings
in which the depth of any cavity prepared for repair welding exceeds 20% of the wall thickness or 1
in. [25 mm], whichever is smaller, must be radiographed to the same standards used to inspect the
castings. When castings are produced with Supplementary Requirement S6, weld repairs must be
inspected by liquid penetrant examination.
f) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this Section indicates the required variations permitted. Table 1,
Heat-treatment requirements, Table 2, Chemical requirements; Table 3, Tensile requirements; Sup-
plementary requirements: S10. Examination of Weld Preparation; S11. Post Weld Heat Treatment.
58) SA-352/352M Specification for Steel Castings, Ferritic and Martensitic, for Pressure
Containing Parts, Suitable for Low-Temperature Service:
This specification covers steel castings for valves, flanges, fittings, and other pressure-containing
parts intended primarily for low-temperature service. Several grades of ferritic steels and one grade
of martensitic steel are covered. This specification covers the low-temperature requirements perti-
nent for ferritic and martensitic steels. Some grades of austenitic steel castings furnished in accord-
ance with specification A 351/A 351M can also be suitable for low-temperature service down to
300F [184C] and others down to 425F [254C]. Materials and tests covered by SA-352 are:
A 351/A 351M - Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts;

A 488/A 488M - Practice for Steel Castings, Welding, Qualifications of Procedures and Personnel;
MSS-SP-55 Quality Standard for Steel Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Fittings and Other Piping Compo-
nents. (Visual Method).
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel is made by the electric furnace process with or without
separate refining, such as argon-oxygen decarburization (AOD). Material furnished to this specifica-
tion must conform to the f specification A 703/A 703M, including any supplementary requirements.
and as to chemical composition, as shown below.
Grade Carbon, Ni Cr Mo Tensile Strength, min.

max. % % % % psi - MPa
LCA 0.25 0.50 0.50 0.20 60.085.0 [415585]
LCB 0.30 0.50 0.50 0.20 65.090.0 [450620]
LCC 0.25 0.50 0.50 0.20 70.095.0 [485655]
LC1 0.25 0.450.65 65.090.0 [450620]
LC2 0.25 2.003.00 70.095.0 [485655]
LC2-1 0.22 2.503.50 1.351.85 0.300.60 105.0130.0 [725895]
LC3 0.15 3.004.00 70.095.0 [485655]
LC4 0.15 4.005.00 70.095.0 [485655]
LC9 0.13 8.5010 0.50 0.20 85.0 [585]
CA6NM 0.06 3.54.5 11.514.0 0.41.0 110.0135.0 [760930]
c) Heat Treatment: Ferritic castings are furnished in the normalized and tempered or liquid-
quenched and tempered condition, except for Grade LC9, which must be liquid-quenched and tem-
pered. Castings are tempered at a minimum of 1100F [590C], except Grade LC4 that must be
1050F [565C], and Grade LC9 that must be tempered in the range of 1050 to 1175F [565 to
635C], followed by cooling in air or liquid. CA6NM castings are heat-treated by heating to 1850F
[1010C] min., and air cooling to 200F [95C] max. before any optional intermediate temper.
The final temper must be between 1050 and 1150F [565 and 620C], and cooled to 100F [40C]
maximum. Liquid quenching of the ferritic grades is normally required to meet the mechanical prop-
erties of heavier sections, and to greatly enhance the low-temperature properties of thinner sections.
d) Inspection and Tests: The notched bar impact properties of the materials can be determined by
testing a set of three Charpy V-notch impact specimens, in accordance with Test Methods A 370.
Visual Method SP-55 or other visual standards may be used to define acceptable surface disconti-
nuities and finish. The castings cannot be peened, plugged, or impregnated to stop leaks.
e) Repair by Welding: Weld repairs must be made using the ASME Section IX procedures and
welders in accordance with Practice A 488/A 488M. Welding of Grade LC9 is accomplished using a
nonmagnetic filler material of AWS classification ENiCrFe-2, tested by liquid penetrant inspection,
when magnetic particle inspection (Supplementary Requirement S4) is specified for the casting.

W eld repairs on castings that have leaked on hydrostatic test, or on castings in which the depth of
any cavity prepared for repair welding exceeds 20% of the wall thickness or 1 in. [25 mm], whichev-
er is smaller, must be radiographed to the same standards used to inspect the castings. Hydrostatic
test defects must also be stress relieved or heat treated after welding. When stress relief is required
for Grade LC9, cooling must be in still air.
Chemical, Tensile and Impact requirements; Table 2, Minimum pre-heat temperatures. Supplemen-
tary requirements: S10. Examination of Weld Preparation; S21. Heat Treatment; S22. Impact Test
Temperatures; S23. Carbon Equivalent (LCA, LCB, LCC).
59) SA-353/353M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, 9% Nickel, Dou-
ble Normalized and Tempered:
This specification covers 9% nickel steel plates, double-normalized and tempered, intended particu-
larly for welded pressure vessels for cryogenic service. Materials and tests covered by SA-353 are:
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel is made by killed procedures and conform to the fine aus-
tenitic grain size requirements of Specification A 20/A 20M. Current mill practice, normally limits this
material specification to 2 in. [50 mm] maximum thickness, limited by the capacity of the materials to
meet specific mechanical properties.
b) Chemical Analysis: The steel must conform to the specific chemical composition requirements,
unless otherwise modified in accordance with Supplementary Requirement S17, Vacuum Carbon-
Deoxidized Steel, in Specification A 20/A 20M.
c) Heat Treatment: For tempering, reheat the plate to a uniform temperature within the range from
1050 to 1125F [565 to 605C], hold this temperature range for a minimum of 1 h/in. 2.4 min/mm of
thickness, but in no case less than 15 min, and cool in air or water quench at a rate not less than
300F/h [165C/h]. For hot forming, after heating is performed in a temperature within the range
from 1650 to 1750F [900 to 955C].
d) Inspection and Tests: Charpy V-notch impact tests can be made in accordance with Specifica-
tion A 20/A 20M, not be less than 20 ftlbf [27 J] at the specified temperature. The longitudinal axis
of the test specimens is transverse to the final rolling direction of the plate, and all tests must be
conducted at 320F [195C].
e) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this section indicates the required variations permitted. Table 1,
Chemical requirements; Table 2, Tensile requirements.

60) SA-354 Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Oth-
er Externally Threaded Fasteners:
This specification covers the chemical and mechanical requirements of quenched and tempered al-
loy steel bolts, studs, and other externally threaded fasteners 4 in. and under in diameter for applica-
tion at normal atmospheric temperatures, where high strength is required and for limited application
at elevated temperatures. Two levels of bolting strength are covered, designated as Grades BC and
BD. Materials and tests covered by SA-354 are:
A 193/A 193M - Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature or
High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications;
A 490 - Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength;
B 695 - Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel
ASME/ANSI B1.1 - Unified Screw Threads;
ASME/ANSI B18.2.1 - Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, Inch Series;
ASME/ANSI B18.24 - Part Identifying Number (PIN) Code System Standard for B18 Fastener Products.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel is made by the open-hearth, electric furnace, or basic-
oxygen process, in accordance with specification F 788/F 788M.
b) Chemical Analysis: All fasteners are made from alloy steels conforming to the chemical compo-
sition requirements, which contain sufficient alloying elements to qualify these fasteners as alloy
steels, in accordance with the table below:
Grade Carbon, Tensile Strength, Hardness Testing

% psi HB (min. max.)
BC 0.28 to 0.55 115 000 125 000 235 - 331
BD 0.33 to 0.55 140 000 150 000 293 - 363
Note: Quenched and tempered alloy steel bolts for structural steel joints above 1 1/2 in. are covered
in Specification A 490. Bolts, studs, or other externally threaded fasteners, to be used at elevated
temperatures, refer to specification A 193/A 193M.
c) Heat Treatment: All fasteners must be heat-treated, performed on the raw material, during the
manufacturing operations, or after final machining, which consist of quenching in a liquid medium
(except Grade BD sizes 1 1/2 in. and smaller quenched in oil).The reheating must be to a tempera-
ture of not less than 800F (427C) for Grade BC and for Grade BD.

d) Inspection and Tests: Fasteners must be tested full size according to the tensile strength, the
proof load and the yield strength requirements in accordance with Table 3 of this Section. When
equipment for full-size testing is not available, or when testing is impractical with full-length of the
fastener, machined specimens can be tested conform to the requirements in accordance with Table
4 of this Section. Nuts must be according to specification A 563. Each grade of nuts must be:
Grade of Fastener and Surface Finish Nut Grade and Style
BC, plain (or with a coating of insufficient

thickness to require over-tapped nuts): C, heavy hex
BC, zinc-coated (or with a coating thickness
requiring over-tapped nuts): DH, heavy hex
BD, all finishes: DH, heavy hex
Test methods must be conducted in accordance with Test Methods F 606. The proof load (rather
than yield strength) is preferred for fasteners 1 1/4 in. and under in diameter. Hexagon bolts are
tested by the wedge tension method, and must show no fracture in the body or threads, or at the
junction of the head and body. Studs and stud-bolts must be tested by the axial tension method.
Dimensions must conform to the latest issue of ASME B18.2.1. Threads are according to Unified
National Coarse Thread Series, Class 2A tolerances. Bolts and studs to be used with nuts or tapped
holes must be in accordance with Specification A 563, Class 2A, before hot dip or mechanically de-
posited zinc coating. The supplier may furnish either a hot-dip zinc coating in accordance with speci-
fication F 2329, or a mechanically deposited zinc coating in accordance with specification B 695,
Class 55. Threaded components (bolts and nuts) are also coated by the same zinc-coating process.
Note: According to tests, hydrogen-stress cracking or stress cracking corrosion may occur on hot-
dip galvanized Grade BD bolts.
e) Product Markings & Packaging: All Grade BC products must be marked BC, and all Grade
BD products are marked BD. Bolts can be marked on the top of the bolt head, with 6 radial lines
60 apart, conform to the requirements of this specification. When studs have both coarse and fine
threads, all markings appear on the coarse thread end, or on the fine thread end. All markings may
be raised or depressed at the manufacturers option. Packaging must be in accordance with Prac-
tice D 3951, Standard Practice for Commercial Packaging.
Chemical requirements; Table 2, Hardness requirements; Table 3, Tensile requirements; Table 4,
Mechanical requirements for Machined Specimens. Supplementary requirements: S1. Marking.
61) SA-358/SA-358M Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Austenitic Chromium-

Nickel Alloy Steel Pipe for High Temperature Service:
This specification covers electric-fusion-welded austenitic chromium-nickel alloy steel pipe suitable
for corrosive or high-temperature service, and covers thirty-seven grades of alloy steels. The plates
used to fabricate the pipes are conform to SA-240, by material grades such as, A 240 N08020, A

240 S20400, A 240 Type XM-19, A 240 Type 304, A 240 Type 304N, A 240 Type 316, A 240 Type
316L, A 240 Type 321, etc. Materials and tests covered by SA-358 are:
A 240/A 240M - Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels;
A 262 - Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular Attack in Austenitic Stainless Steels
ASME Section I - Rules for Construction of Power Boilers;
ASME Section IX - Welding and Qualifications;
AWS A 5.22 - Flux Cored Arc Welding;
AWS A 5.30 - Consumable Weld Inserts for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding;
AWS A 5.4 - Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Steel Covered Welding Electrodes;
AWS A 5.9 - Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Steel Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes;
AWS A 5.11 - Nickel and Nickel-Alloy Covered Welding Electrodes;
AWS A 5.14 - Nickel and Nickel-Alloy Bare Welding Rods and Electrodes.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel plate material must conform to the requirements of one of
the grades of Specification A 240/A 240M (listed in Table 1 of this Section), and the applicable re-
quirements of specification A 999/A 999M. Five classes of pipes are covered, as follows:
Class 1: Double welded pipes, by processes employing filler metal in all passes, completely
radiographed.
Class 2: Double welded pipes, by processes employing filler metal in all passes, no radio-
graphy is required.
Class 3: Single welded pipes, by processes employing filler metal in all passes, completely
radiographed.
Class 4: Single welded pipes, except that the weld pass exposed to the inside pipe surface,
may be made without the addition of a filler metal.
Class 5: Double welded pipes, by processes employing filler metal in all passes, which may
spot radiographed.
b) Chemical Analysis: The chemical composition of the welding filler metal must conform to the re-
quirements of the applicable AWS specification for the corresponding grade shown in Table 1 of this
Section, or conform to the chemical composition of the specification A 240/A 240M, or may be a fill-
er metal more highly alloyed than the base metal, when specified, needed for corrosion resistance
or other application properties.
c) Heat Treatment: Consist of heating the material to a minimum temperature of 1900F [1040C],
except for grades S31266, S31254, S32654, S32050, and S30815, heated to a minimum tempera-
ture of 2100F [1150C], and 1920F [1050C] respectively. Grade S24565 is heated to a minimum
temperature of 2050F [1120C], N08367 is heat treated to a minimum temperature of 2025F
[1107C], and N08926 is heat treated to a minimum temperature of 2010F [1100C].

Grade N08904 is heat treated to a minimum temperature of 2000F [1095C] and cooled rapidly.
Grade N08810 is heated to a minimum temperature of 2050F [1120C] and cooled rapidly. Grade
N08020 is heated in the range from 1800 to 1850F [982 to 1010C] and cooled rapidly. All other
heat-treatments are followed by quenching in water, or rapidly cooling by other means.
Note: Solution annealing temperature above 1950F [1065C] may impair the resistance to intergra-
nular corrosion after exposure to sensitizing conditions for Grades 321H, 347H, and 348H. Final
heat-treatment temperature under 1900F [1040C] must be stenciled with the suffix HT.
d) Inspection and Tests: Transverse tension and bend test specimens can be taken from the end
of the finished pipe. Two bend test specimens to represent each lot, are taken transversely from the
pipe, and be flattened cold before final machining to size. The bend test is acceptable when no
cracks or other defects exceeding 1/8 in. [3 mm] in any direction be present in the weld or between
the weld and the pipe metal after bending. Cracks that originate along the edges of the specimen
during testing, less than 1/4 in. [6.5 mm], measured in any direction - may not be considered.
e) Radiographic Examination: May be performed prior to heat treatment. For Classes 1, 3, and 4,
all welded joints can be completely examined by radiography. For Class 5, the welded joints are
spot radiographed to the extent of not less than 12 in. [300 mm] of radiograph per 50 ft [15 m] of
weld. Classes 1, 3, 4 and Class 5 pipes, the radiographic examination can be in accordance with the
requirements of the ASME Section VIII, Paragraph UW-51, and Paragraph UW-52, respectively.
f) Hydrostatic Tests: Each pipe can be subjected to the hydrostatic test or nondestructive electric
test, in accordance with specification A 999/A 999M, at the option of the manufacturer. The hydro-
static test may be lower or higher than the specification test pressure, but in no case be lower than
the system design pressure. The hydrostatic test must be held for a sufficient time to permit the in-
spector to examine the entire length of the welded seam. Pipes furnished without hydrostatic tests,
must include the mandatory marking letters, NH.
g) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this section indicates the required variations permitted. Table 1,
Plate and Filler Metals Specifications. Supplementary specifications: S1. Product Analysis; S2. Ten-
sion and Bend Tests; S3. Penetrant Oil and Powder Examination; S4. Ferrite Control in Weld De-
posits; S5. Stabilizing Heat Treatment; S6. Intergranular Corrosion Tests.
62) SA-369/SA-369M Specification for Carbon and Ferritic Alloy Steel Forged and Bored
Pipe for High Temperature Service:
This specification covers heavy-wall carbon and alloy-steel pipes made from turned and bored forgi-
gs, intended for high-temperature service. This pipe specification can be suitable for bending, other
forming operations, and for fusion weldings. Several grades of ferritic steels are covered, such as,
FPA, FPB, FP5, FP9, FP21, FP22, etc. The materials and tests covered by SA-369 are:
E 290 - Test Methods for Bend Testing of Material for Ductility;
ASME Section IX - Welding Qualifications.

a) Materials and Manufacture: Materials for forging consist of ingots or of blooms, billets, or solid-
rolled bars forged or rolled from an ingot, and cut to the required length, by processes that cannot
produce injurious defects. The materials can be forged by hammering or pressing, and brought as
nearly as practicable, to the finished shape and size by hot working.
b) Chemical Analysis: The steel must conform to the chemical requirements composition pre-
scribed in Table 1 of this Section, and conform to the applicable requirements of the specification A
999/A 999M.
c) Heat Treatment: All grades other than FPA, FPB, FP1, FP2, FP12, FP91, and FP92 must be re-
heated and furnished in the full-annealed or normalized and tempered condition, to the temperature
of 1250F [680C] or higher for Grades FP5, FP9, FP21, and FP22, and 1200F [650C] or higher
for Grades FP36 and FP11.
Grades FPA and FPB after heat treatment must be either normalized or stress relieved at 1200 to
1300F [650 to 705C]. Grades FP1, FP2, and FP12, after heat-treatment must be stress-relieved at
1200 to 1300F [650 to 705C]. Grades FP91 and FP92 must be normalized and tempered within
the temperature range from 1900 to 1975F [1040 to 1080C], followed by air cooling and tempering
in the temperature range of 1350 to 1470F [730 to 800C].
Note: After heat treatment, all pipes can be machined with a roughness finish value, no greater than
250 in. [6.4 m] arithmetical average deviation (AA), terms as defined in ANSI B 46.1-1962.
d) Inspection and Tests: For pipes NPS 14 or less, with diameter to wall thickness ratios of more
than 7.0, a flattening test can be made on specimens taken from one end of each length of a pipe,
in accordance with specification A 999/A 999M. For pipes larger than NPS 14 with diameters to wall
thickness ratio is equal 7.0 or less, a bend test can be made, according to Test Methods E 290.
welders in accordance with Practice A 488/A 488M.
Chemical requirements; Table 2, Tensile requirements. Supplementary specifications: S1. Additional
Tension Test; S2. Additional Flattening or Bend Tests; S3. Ultrasonic Tests; S4. Hydrostatic Test;
S5. Metal Structure and Etching Tests; S6. Alternative Heat Treatment Grades FP91 and FP92.
63) SA-370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products:
These test methods cover procedures and definitions for the mechanical testing of wrought and cast
steels, stainless steels, and related alloys. The mechanical tests here described are used to deter-
mine properties required in the product specifications. Improper machining or preparation of test
specimens may give erroneous results. Care should be exercised to assure good workmanship in
machining. The materials and tests covered by SA-370 are:
A 781/A 781M Specif. for Castings, Steel and Alloy, Common Requirements, for General Industrial Use;

A 833 - Practice for Indentation Hardness of Metallic Materials by Comparison Hardness Testers
A 880 - Practice for Criteria for Use in Evaluation of Testing Laboratories and Organizations for Examination
and Inspection of Steel, Stainless Steel, and Related Alloys;
E 4 - Practices for Force Verification of Testing Machines;
E 6 - Terminology Relating to Methods of Mechanical Testing;
E 8M - Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials [Metric];
E 10 - Test Method for Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materials;
E 18 - Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials;
E 23 - Test Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of Metallic Materials;
E 29 - Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to Determine Conformance with Specifications
E 83 - Practice for Verification and Classification of Extensometer System
E 110 -Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Metallic Materials by Portable Hardness Testers
E 190 - Test Method for Guided Bend Test for Ductility of Welds;
E 290 - Test Method for Bend Testing of Material for Ductility;
E 1595 - Practice for Evaluating the Performance of Mechanical Testing Laboratories;
ASME Section VIII - Division I, Part UG-8.
a) Tension Tests: Are related to the mechanical testing of steel products subjects a machined or
full-section specimen of the material under examination to a measured load sufficient to cause rup-
ture. The resulting properties are defined in Terminology E 6. In general, the testing equipment and
methods are given in Test Methods E 8. The main specific tests are the tensile strength, yield point,
yield strength, elongation, and reduction of area.
There are two general types of loading systems, mechanical (screw power) and hydraulic. The older
screw power is limited to a small number of fixed free running crosshead speeds. The tension test-
ing machine shall be maintained in good operating condition, used only in the proper loading range,
and calibrated periodically in accordance with Practices E 4.
If the machine is equipped with a device to indicate the rate of loading, the speed of the machine
from half the specified yield point or yield strength may be adjusted so that the rate of stressing does
not exceed 100 000 psi (690 MPa)/min. However, the minimum rate of stressing cannot be less than
10 000 psi (70 MPa)/min.
Plate-Type Specimen: Is used for testing metallic materials in the form of plate, structural and bar-
size shapes, and flat material having a nominal thickness of 3/16 in. (5 mm) or over. When product
specifications so permit, other types of specimens may be used. The standard plate-type test spec-
imen is shown below.
Sheet-Type Specimen: Is used for testing metallic materials in the form of sheet, plate, flat wire,
strip, band, and hoop ranging in nominal thickness from 0.005 to 34 in. (0.13 to 19 mm). When
product specifications so permit, other types of specimens may be used. The standard sheet-type
test specimen is shown below.
Round Specimens: Are used to test materials from which the standard specimen or specimens
cannot be prepared. The standard 0.500 in. (12.5 mm) diameter round test specimen shown below

is used quite generally for testing metallic materials, both cast and wrought. The small size speci-
mens must be proportional to the standard specimen.
Gage Marks: The purpose of gage marks is to determine the percent elongation. Punch marks are
light, sharp, and accurately spaced. The gage marks for measuring elongation after fracture are
made on the flat or on the edge of the flat tension test specimen and within the parallel section; for
the 8 in. gage length specimen, as shown below, one or more sets of 8 in. gage marks may be
used, intermediate marks within the gage length being optional. Rectangular 2-in. gage length spec-
imens, and round specimens, are gage marked with a double-pointed center punch or scribe marks.
Yield Point: Is the first stress in a material, less than the maximum obtainable stress, at which an
increase in strain occurs without an increase in stress. Yield point is intended for application only for
materials that may exhibit the unique characteristic of showing an increase in strain without an in-
crease in stress. The stress strain diagram is characterized by a sharp knee or discontinuity. Yield
point is determined by one of the following methods:
Drop of the Beam Method: In this method, is applied an increasing load to the specimen at
a uniform rate, with a lever and poise machine.
Autographic Diagram Method: A sharp-kneed stress-strain diagram is obtained by an au-
tographic recording device.
Yield Strength: Is the stress at which a material exhibits a specified limiting deviation from the pro-
portionality of stress to strain. The deviation is expressed in terms of strain, percent offset, total ex-
tension under load, etc.
Offset Method: To determine the yield strength by the offset method, is necessary to secure data
(autographic or numerical) from which a stress-strain diagram with a distinct modulus characteristic
of the material being tested, may be drawn. The recording values of this yield strength obtained by
this method, are stated in parentheses after the term yield strength, for example: Yield strength
(0.2% offset) of 52 000 psi (360 MPa).

Tensile Strength: Is calculated by dividing the maximum load the specimen sustains during a ten-
sion test, by the original cross-sectional area of the specimen.
Elongation: Is the increase in length of the gage length, expressed as a percentage of the original
gage length. In recording elongation values, give both the percentage increase and the original
gage length. Elongation at fracture includes elastic and plastic elongation and may be determined
with autographic or automated methods using extensometers.
Reduction of Area: Is the difference between original cross sectional area of a specimen and the
area of its smallest cross section after testing. It is usually expressed as % decrease in original
cross section. The smallest cross section can be measured at or after fracture.
Rectangular Tension Test Specimen Standard Round Tension Test Specimen 2in. Gage Length
b) Bend Test: Is a method for evaluating ductility, but cannot be considered as a quantitative means
of predicting service performance in bending operations. These conditions are varied according to
location and orientation of the test specimen and the chemical composition, tensile properties, hard-
ness, type, and quality of the steel specified. Test Method E 190 and Test Method E 290 may be
consulted for methods of performing the test.
c) Hardness Test: Is a means of determining resistance with a penetration scale tool employed to
obtain a quick approximation of tensile strength. When recording hardness numbers, the measured
hardness and test scale can be indicated in parentheses, for example: 38 HRC (353 HB). This
means that a hardness value of 38 was obtained using the Rockwell C scale and converted to a
Brinell hardness of 353. The most common hardness tests types for ferrous materials are:
Brinell Test: A specified load is applied to a flat surface of the specimen to be tested,
through a hard ball of specified diameter. The average diameter of the indentation is used as
a basis for calculation of the Brinell hardness number. The standard Brinell test using a 10
mm ball employs a 3000 kgf load for hard materials and a 1500 or 500 kgf load for thin sec-
tions or soft materials.
Rockwell Test: Is when a hardness value is obtained by determining the depth of penetra-
tion of a diamond point or a steel ball into the specimen under certain arbitrarily fixed condi-
tions. A minor load of 10 kgf is first applied which causes an initial penetration, sets the pen-
etrator on the material and holds it in position. The scale symbols are: B uses a 1/16 in.
steel ball, major load 100 kgf, minor load 10 kgf. The scale C uses a diamond brale, major
load 150 kgf, minor load 10 kgf. Loads of 15, 30, or 45 kgf are applied on a hardened steel
ball or diamond penetrator, with the same range of hardness values, as for heavier loads.

Reporting Hardness: In recording hardness values, the hardness number shall always precede the
scale symbol, for example: 96 HRB, 40 HRC, 75 HR15N, or 77 HR30T. Hardness testing using
portable equipment as described in Test Method E 110, Practice A 833 can also be used.
d) Charpy V-Notch Impact Test: Is a dynamic test in which a notched specimen is struck and bro-
ken by a single blow in a specially designed testing machine. The measured test values may be the
energy absorbed, the percentage shear fracture, the lateral expansion opposite the notch, or a
combination of both. Calibration and adjust of Charpy impact machines must be in accordance with
the requirements of Test Methods E 23.
e) Tables: Next, this section indicates the required variations permitted. Table 1, Diameters of round
test specimens; Table 2 & Table 3, Approximate hardness conversion numbers for nonaustenitic
steels; Table 4 & Table 5, Approximate hardness conversion numbers for austenitic steels; Table 6,
Brinnel hardness numbers; Table 7 & Table 8; Percent shear for measurements (in. & mm); Table 9
Charpy V-Notch test acceptance criteria.
f) Annexes: Are mandatory information for this Section. A1. Steel Bar Products; A2. Steel Tubular
Products; A3. Round Wire Products; A5. Notes on Significance of Notched Bar Impact Testing; A6.
Procedure for Converting Percentage Elongation of a Standard Round Test Specimen to Equivalent
Percentage Elongation of a Standard Flat Specimen; A7. Method of Testing Multi-Wire Strand for
Prestressed Concrete; A8. Rounding of Test Data; A9. Methods for Testing Steel Reinforced Bars;
A10. Procedure for Use and Control of Heat-Cycle Simulation.
g) Annexed Tables: Table A1.1, Practices for selecting tension test specimens; Table A1.2, Rec-
ommended practice for selecting bend test specimens; Table A2.1, Wall thickness limitations of su-
perficial hardness test on annealed or ductile materials; Table A2.2, Wall thickness limitations of su-
perficial hardness test on cold worked or heat-treated material; Table A5.1, Effect of varying notch
dimensions on standard specimens; Table A6.1, Carbon and alloy steels, material constant; Table
A6.2, Annealed austenitic stainless steels, material constant; Table A8.1, Recommended values for
rounding test data; Table A10.1, Heat-treat record, essential variables.
64) SA-372/SA-372M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings for Thin-Walled
Pressure Vessels:

This specification covers relatively thin-walled forgings (including gas bottles) for pressure vessel
use. Three types of carbon steel and six types of alloy steel are included. Provision is made for int e-
grally forging the ends of vessel bodies made from seamless pipe or tubing. The materials and tests
covered by SA-372 are:
A 388/A 388M - Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Heavy Steel Forgings;
E 165 - Practice for Liquid Penetrant Examination;
E 290 - Test Method for Semi-Guided Bend Test for Ductility of Metallic Materials;
E 433 - Reference Photographs for Liquid Penetrant Inspection.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel that has been vacuum treated prior to or during the pour-
ing of the ingot, in order to remove objectionable gases, particularly hydrogen, can be used, except
for Grade M forgings. The production of gas bottles and similar vessels include the cupping of slabs
or plates, the piercing of billets or plates, and the subsequent drawing of cups. These semi-finished
forgings or seamless steel pipes or tubings are closed by spinning, swedging, or pressing.
The current grades are: Grade A; Grade B; Grade C; Grade D; Grade E Class 55; Grade E Class
65; Grade E Class 70; Grade F Class 55; Grade F Class 65; Grade F Class 70; Grade G Class 55;
Grade G Class 65; Grade G Class 70; Grade H Class 55; Grade H Class 65; Grade H Class 65;
Grade H Class 70; Grade J Class 55; Grade J Class 65; Grade J Class 70; Grade K, Grade L;
Grade J Class 110; Grade M Class 85; Grade M Class 100.
b) Chemical Analysis: The steel must conform to the chemical composition prescribed in Table 1
of this Section, and conform to the applicable requirements of the specification A 788. The addition
of any element, beyond those listed for the applicable grade of the material is not permitted.
c) Heat Treatment: Grades A, B, C, D and Classes 55, 65, 70 of Grades E, F, G, H, and J forgings
must be normalized and tempered, or liquid-quenched and tempered. Grades K, L, M, and Class
110 of Grade J forgings are liquid-quenched and tempered. When normalized forgings are to be
tempered (min. 1100F [595C]), or when forgings have been quenched, they must be reheated to a
subcritical temperature and held for at least 1/2 h/in. [25 mm] of maximum cross section.
Note: Heat treatment is to be performed after all forming operations. Welding prior to heat treatment
and fabrication welding of pressure shell are not permitted.
d) Inspection and Tests: For bored or hollow forgings with outside diameters of 14 in. [355 mm]
and over, or where the D/T ratio is 10.0 and over or less, a flattening or a transverse bend test is
required, according to Arrangement C of Test Method E 290. No cracks or ruptures in the test piece
are allowable when the test piece is bent. For heat-treated forgings weighing 1000 lb [450 kg] or
more, one tension test must be taken, but not more than ten forgings in a heat-treat lot.
All quenched and tempered forgings are subject to magnetic particle examination after heat treat-

ment, in accordance with Test Method A 275/A 275M. The forgings must be free from linear indica-
tions indicative of cracks. In case of doubt, may also be inspected for Type II indications indicated in
Reference Photographs E 433, when inspected by liquid penetrant method, in accordance with
Practice E 165.
Note: A batch lot of up to 200 pieces in a continuous furnace is subject to a uniformity check by
Brinell hardness testing. For this purpose, 10% of the furnace production must be sampled and
meet the minimum hardness number specified is this Section.
welders in accordance with Practice A 488/A 488M.
Chemical requirements; Table 2, Mechanical requirements; Table 3, Distance between plates for
flattening tests; Table 4, Maximum pin diameters and minimum angle for bend tests. Supplementary
specifications: S1. Grain Size; S2. Rough Machining; S3. Impact Testing; S4. Fracture Toughness;
S5. Ultrasonic Examination.
65) SA-376/SA-376M Specification for Seamless Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Tem-
perature Central-Station Service:
This specification covers seamless austenitic steel pipe intended for high-temperature central-
station service. Among the grades covered in this specification such as, TP304, TP316, TP348, etc.,
there are five H grades and two nitrogen grades (304N and 316N) that are specifically intended for
high-temperature service. The materials and tests covered by SA-376 are:
E 426 - Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Examination of Seamless and Welded Tubular Products,
Austenitic Stainless Steel and Similar Alloys;
ASNT-SNT-TC-1A Personnel Qualification and Certification in Nondestructive Testing.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The pipe steel may be either hot-finished or cold-finished, with a
suitable finishing treatment. Grades TP321 and TP321H have lower strength requirements for nom-
inal wall thicknesses greater than 3/8 in. [9.5 mm].
b) Chemical Analysis: The chemical composition must conform to the corresponding grade shown
in Table 1 of this Section, according to specification A 999/A 999M.
c) Heat Treatment: All pipes are furnished in the heat-treated condition. For H grades, separate so-
lution treatments are required for solution annealing. The heat treatment for Grades TP304, TP316,
TP304N, TP304LN, TP316N, TP316LN, TP321, TP347, TP348, 16-8-2H, S31725, and S31726,
consist of heating to a minimum temperature of 1900F [1040C].

For cold-rolled materials, the minimum solution-treating temperature for Grades TP321H, TP347H,
and TP348H is 2000F [1100C], Grades TP304H and TP316H is 1900F [1040C], and Grade 16-
8-2H is 1800F [980C]. For hot-rolled materials, the minimum solution-treating temperatures for
Grades TP321H, TP347H, and TP348H is 1925F [1050C], Grades TP304H and TP316H, 1900F
[1040C], and for Grade 16-8-2H is 1800F [980C]. For Grade S34565 is 2050F [1120C] mini-
mum and 2140F [1170C] maximum. Quenching in water or rapidly cooling by other means.
Solution annealing temperature above 1950F [1065C] may impair the resistance to intergranular
corrosion after exposure to sensitizing conditions for Grades 321H, 347H, and 348H. The grain size
of grades 304H, 316H, 321H, 347H, and 348H must be No. 7 or coarser, in accordance with Test
Methods E 112. Final heat-treatment temperature under 1900F [1040C] must be stenciled with the
suffix HT.
d) Inspection and Tests: Transverse or longitudinal tension test can be performed on 1% from
each pipe lot. The flattening test shall be made on 5% of the pipe from each heat-treated lot, but in
no case less than two pipes. Each pipe can be examined with a nondestructive test in accordance
with Practice E 213 or Practice E 426.
The Ultrasonic Testing (UT) can be performed to detect both longitudinally and circumferentially ori-
ented defects. The examination may not detect short, deep, defects. The minimum nominal trans-
ducer frequency must be 2.00 MHz and the maximum nominal transducer size must be 1.5 in. The
Eddy-Current Testing (ET) has the capability of detecting significant discontinuities, especially the
short abrupt type. The maximum eddy-current coil frequency could be: on specified walls up to
0.050 in, 100 KHz max; on specified walls up to 0.150 in., 50 KHz max.; on specified walls up to
0.150 in., 10 KHz max. The operator must be certified in accordance with SNT-TC-1A.
The signal-to-noise ratio for the reference standard shall be 2 1/2 to 1 or greater. Extraneous signals
caused by identifiable causes such as, ding, scratches, dents, straightener marks, and so forth,
cannot be considered noise. The rejection amplitude must be adjusted to at least 50% of full scale
of the readout display. If upon any standardization, the rejection amplitude decreased by 29% (3 dB)
of peak height from the last standardization, the pipe since the last calibration must be rejected.
Note: Weld repairs are permitted only subject to the approval of the purchaser and in accordance
with Specification A 999/A 999M. When imperfections or defects are removed by grinding, a smooth
curved surface must be maintained, and the wall thickness cannot be decreased below that permit-
ted by this specification.
test, in accordance with specification A 999/A 999M, at the option of the manufacturer. The hydro-
static test may be lower or higher than the specification test pressure, but in no case be lower than
the system design pressure. The hydrostatic test must be held for a sufficient time to permit the in-
spector to examine the entire length of the welded seam. Pipes furnished without hydrostatic tests,
must include the mandatory marking letters, NH.
Chemical requirements; Table 1, Tensile requirements. Supplementary specifications: S1. Product

Analysis; S2. Transverse Tension Tests; S3. Flattening Test; S4. Etching Tests; S5. Photomicro-
graphs; S6. Ultrasonic Test; S7. Hot Ductility Test for Indicating Weldability; S8. Retests; S9. Stabili-
zation Heat Treatment; S10. Intergranular Corrosion Test.
66) SA-387/SA-387M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-
Molybdenum:
This specification covers chromium-molybdenum alloy steel plates intended primarily for welded
boilers and pressure vessels designed for elevated temperature service. Plates are available under
this specification in several grades having different alloy contents as follows:
Grade Type Carbon, Cr Mo Tensile Strength, Tensile Strength,

% % % Class 1-ksi-MPa Class 2-ksi-MPa
Grade 2 S50460 0.050.21 0.500.80 0.450.60 55 to 80 [380 to 550] 70 to 90 [485 to 620]
Grade 12 K11757 0.050.17 0.801.15 0.450.60 55 to 80 [380 to 550] 65 to 85 [450 to 585]
Grade 11 K11789 0.050.17 1.001.50 0.450.65 60 to 85 [415 to 585] 75 to 100 [515 to 690]
Grade 22 K21590 0.050.15 2.002.50 0.901.10 60 to 85 [415 to 585] 75 to 100 [515 to 690]
Grade 22L K21590 0.10 max 2.002.50 0.901.10 60 to 85 [415 to 585]
Grade 21 K31545 0.050.15 2.753.25 0.901.10 60 to 85 [415 to 585] 75 to 100 [515 to 690]
Grade 21L K31545 0.10 max 2.753.25 0.901.10 60 to 85 [415 to 585]
Grade 5 S50200 0.15 max 4.006.00 0.450.65 60 to 85 [415 to 585] 75 to 100 [515 to 690]
Grade 9 K90941 0.15 max 8.0010.00 0.901.10 60 to 85 [415 to 585] 75 to 100 [515 to 690]
Grade 91 K91560 0.080.12 8.009.50 0.851.05 85 to 110 [585 to 760]
A 307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength;
A 578/A 578M - Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Plain and Clad Steel Plates;
A 1017/A 1017M - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum-Tungsten.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel is made by killed process.
b) Chemical Analysis: The steel must conform to chemical composition shown in Table 1 of this
Section, in accordance with Supplementary Requirement S17, Vacuum Carbon-Deoxidized Steel -
and according to specification A 20/A 20M for grades other than Grade 11.
c) Heat Treatment: All plates, except for Grade 91, must be thermally treated by annealing, normal-
izing and tempering at 1150 [620] minimum, followed by cooling with air blasting or liquid quenching.
Grade 91 plates are normalized at 1900 to 1975F [1040 to 1080C] and tempered at 1350 to
1470F [730 to 800C].
d) Inspection and Tests: The tension test specimens must conform to the applicable mechanical
requirements of the table shown above.
e) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this section indicates the required variations permitted. Table 1,
Chemical requirements; Table 2, Tensile requirements for Class 1 Plates; Table 3, Tensile require-

ments for Class 2 Plates. Supplementary specifications: S60. Restricted Carbon; S62. Temper
Embrittlement Factor; S63. Impact Properties After Step Cooling.
67) SA-388/SA-388M Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Heavy Steel Forgings:
This practice covers the examination procedures for the contact, pulse-echo ultrasonic examination
of heavy steel forgings by the straight and angle-beam examination. These techniques include utili-
zation of the DGS (Distance Gain-Size) method. The materials and tests covered by SA-388 are:
A 469/A 469M - Specification for Vacuum-Treated Steel Forgings for Generator Rotors;
A 745/A 745M - Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Austenitic Steel Forgings;
E 317 - Practice for Evaluating Performance Characteristics of Ultrasonic Pulse-Echo Testing Instruments and
Systems without the Use of Electronic Measurement Instruments;
E 428 - Practice for Fabrication and Control of Metal, Other than Aluminum Reference, Blocks Used in Ultra-
sonic Examination;
E 1065 - Guide for Evaluating Characteristics of Ultrasonic Search Units;
ASME/ANSI B 46.1 - Surface Texture.
a) Preparation for Ultrasonic Examination: Round forgings are machined to provide cylindrical
surfaces for radial examination. Faces of disks and rectangular forgings are machined flat and paral-
lel to one another. The surface roughness must not exceed 250 in. [6 m] unless otherwise shown on
the forging drawing. Radii at change of sections may be impossible to examine some sections. The
ultrasonic examination must be performed after heat treatment (exclusive of stress relief treatments)
but prior to drilling holes, cutting keyways, tapers, grooves, or machining sections.
b) Apparatus: An ultrasonic instrument, reflection type, pulsed must be used, with a minimum ca-
pability for examining at frequencies from 1 to 5 MHz, and for austenitic stainless forgings must
have ca-pabilities for examining at frequencies down to 0.4 MHz.
The ultrasonic instrument must provide linear presentation (within 5%) for at least 75% of the screen
height (sweep line to top of screen), descriptive of the amplitude screen presentation. Instrument
linearity must be verified in accordance with Practice E 317, and any set of blocks processed in ac-
cordance with Practice E 317 or E 428 may be used, to specify the 5% instrument linearity. The
electronic apparatus must contain an attenuator (useful range to 10% (+1 dB) of the amplitude ra-
tio), which can allow measurement of indications, beyond the linear range of the instrument.

Transducers must be utilized with a maximum active area of 1 in. [650 mm] with 3/4 in. [20 mm]
minimum to 1 1/8 in. [30 mm] maximum, used for straight-beam scanning and angle-beam scan-
ning. Search units maximum with 1/2 in. [13 mm] and minimum to 1 in. [25 mm]. Couplants, must
have good wetting characteristics such as, SAE No. 20 or No. 30 motor oil, glycerin, pine oil, or w a-
ter, and cannot be comparable to one another, but the same couplant can be used for calibration.
Reference blocks, containing flat-bottom holes may be used for calibration, and may be used to es-
tablish recording levels for straight-beam examination. DGS Scales, matched to the ultrasonic test
unit and transducer, may be also used to establish recording levels for straight beam examination,
and include the full thickness cross-section of the forging to be examined.
c) Procedure: For manual scanning, do not exceed a scanning rate of 6 in./s [150 mm/s]. For au-
tomated scanning, adjust scanning speed or instrument repetition rate, or both, to permit detection
of the smallest discontinuities and to allow the recording or signaling device to function.
Scan disk forgings using a straight beam technique from at least one flat face and radially from the
circumference, whenever practicable. Scan cylindrical sections and hollow forgings radially using a
straight-beam technique.
d) Straight-Beam Examination: Use a nominal 2 1/4 MHz search unit whenever practicable; how-
ever, 1 MHz is the preferred frequency for coarse grained austenitic materials and long testing dis-
tances, but in many instances, it may be necessary to use a frequency of 0.4 MHz. Establish the in-
strument sensitivity by either the reflection, reference-block technique, or DGS method.
e) Angle-Beam Examination: Use a 1 MHz, 45 angle-beam search unit unless thickness, OD/ID
ratio, or other geometric configuration results in failure to achieve calibration. Other frequencies may
be used if desirable for better resolution, penetrability, or detectability of flaws. Perform the examina-
tion from the circumference of rings and hollow forgings that have an axial length greater than 2 in.
[50 mm] and an outside to inside diameter ratio of less than 2.0 to 1.
f) Quality Levels: Methods and standards employed for ultrasonic examination of carbon and low-
alloy steel forgings may not be applicable to heavy austenitic steel forgings. Heavy austenitic stain-
less steel forgings are more difficult to penetrate ultrasonically than similar carbon or low-alloy steel
forgings. The degree of attenuation normally increases with section size, and the noise level in iso-
lated areas, may become too great to permit detection of discrete indications. In most instances, this
attenuation results from inherent coarse grained microstructure of these austenitic alloys.
Note: In general, only straight beam inspecting using a back-reflection reference standard is used.
However, utilization of Practice A 745/A 745M for austenitic steel forgings can be considered, if flat
bottom hole reference standards or angle beam examinations of these grades are required.
g) Report: For the purpose of recordable indications, a sketch shall be prepared showing the phys-
ical outline of the forging including dimensions of all areas not inspected due to geometric configura-
tion, the purchasers drawing number, the purchasers order number, and the manufacturers serial
number, and the axial, radial, and circumferential distribution of recordable ultrasonic indications.
The designation (including year date) to which the examination was performed, as well as the fre-

quency used, method of setting sensitivity, type of instrument, surface finish, couplant, and search
unit employed, and the inspectors name or identity and date the examination.
h) Supplementary Requirements: Reference block calibration must be performed using at least

three holes, spaced to approximate minimum, mean, and maximum thickness, used to generate a
distance amplitude correction (DAC) curve. Reporting criteria can include, all indications exceeding
the DAC curve; two or more indications separated by 1/2 in. [12 mm] or less.
68) SA-395/SA-395M Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings

for Use at Elevated Temperatures:
This specification covers ductile iron castings for pressure-retaining parts for use at elevated tem-
peratures. Valves, flanges, pipe fittings, pumps, and other piping components are manufactured and
supplied by casting manufacturers. Castings of all grades are suitable for use up to 450F. The m a-
terials and tests covered by SA-395 are:
A 247 - Test Method for Evaluating the Microstructure of Graphite in Iron Castings;
A 536 - Specification for Ductile Iron Castings;
A 732/A 732M - Specification for Castings, Investment, Carbon and Low Alloy Steel for General Application,
and Cobalt Alloy for High Strength at Elevated Temperatures;
A 834 - Specification for Common Requirements for Iron Castings for General Industrial Use;
E 10 - Test Method for Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materials;
E 186 - Reference Radiographs for Heavy-Walled (2 to 412 in. [51 to 114 mm]) Steel Castings;
E 280 - Reference Radiographs for Heavy-Walled (412 to 12 in. [114 to 305 mm]) Steel Castings;
E 446 - Reference Radiographs for Steel Castings up to 2 in. [51 mm] in Thickness;
E 689 - Reference Radiographs for Ductile Iron Castings;
F 1476 - Specification for Performance of Gasketed Mechanical Couplings for Use in Piping Applications;
F 1548 - Specification for the Performance of Fittings for Use with Gasketed Mechanical Couplings used in
Piping Applications;
MSS-SP 25 - Standard Marking Systems for Valves, Flanges, Pipe Fittings, and Unions.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The melting method and the nodularizing practice can be optional
by the foundry. Grade 60-40-18 and Grade 65-45-15 castings may be supplied as-cast conditions.
Grade Tensile Strength, Hardness Testing

min. psi - MPa HB (min. max.)
Grade 60-40-18 60 000 [415] 143187
Grade 65-45-15 65 000 [450] 156201
b) Chemical Analysis: Must be made in accordance with Test Method E 1806. The castings must
conform to the following requirements for chemical composition: Total carbon, 3.00% min.; Silicon,
2.50% max.; Phosphorus, 0.08 % , max. For each reduction of 0.01% below the maximum specified
phosphorus content, an increase of 0.08% silicon above the specified maximum can be permitted,
up to a maximum of 2.75%.

Note: Silicon contents above 2.75%, or phosphorus contents above 0.08 % have a tendency to
lower the impact resistance of the material. If the carbon content is below 3.00%, excess cementite
may form during cooling, and must be removed during heat treatment, as the impact resistance of
the material may be lowered.
c) Heat Treatment: All plates, except for Grade 91, must be thermally treated by annealing, normal-
izing and tempering at 1150 [620] minimum, followed by cooling with air blasting or liquid quenching.
Grade 91 plates are normalized at 1900 to 1975F [1040 to 1080C] and tempered at 1350 to
1470F [730 to 800C].
d) Inspection and Tests: The standard machined 1/2 in. [12.5 mm] round tension test specimen
with 2 in. [50 mm] gage length can be used, except where the 1/2 in. [12.5 mm] Y-block test coupon
is required. A metallographic examination may be substituted for the tension test when separately
cast test coupons are used. The test specimens are made according to specification A 732/A 732M
or Test Methods and Definitions A 370.
e) Pressure Test Requirements: Grade 60-40-18 casting must be tested after machining to a test
pressure specified by the applicable standard of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code with-
out leaks. Castings Grade 65-45-15 must be capable of passing a hydrostatic test compatible with
the rating of the finished cast component. Such tests are conducted by the casting manufacturer on-
ly when Supplementary Requirement S2 is specified.
f) Microstructure: For Grade 60-40-18, the microstructure of the castings must be essentially
ferritic without massive carbides. For Grade 65-45-15, the microstructure of the castings must be
maximum 45% pearlitic, without massive carbides, both grades with a minimum 90% Type I and
Type II Graphite or Plate I of Test Method A 247.
g) Hydrostatic Tests Leaks: Castings Grade 60-40-18, which leak on hydrostatic tests may be re-
paired by plugging, provided that no welding or brazing is permitted, and the diameter of the plug
cannot exceed the diameter of a standard 2 in. [ISO R2] pipe plug.
Note: The castings represented by test specimens, including hardness determined in accordance
with Test Method E 10, must conform to the mechanical property requirements in Table 1, of this
Section. The percentage of each graphite type is determined by manual counting, semi-automatic,
or automatic image analysis methods. The sum of all graphite types must total to 100%.
h) Repair by Welding: Castings for valves, flanges, pipe fittings, pumps, and other piping compo-
nents ordered under this Section cannot be repaired by plugging, welding or brazing.
i) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this section indicates the required variations permitted. Table 1,
Mechanical property requirements; Table 2, Minimum sections of repaired sections; Table 3, Mini-
mum radius of repaired sections; Table 4, Minimum ligament between plugs. Supplementary speci-
fications: S1. Casting; S2. Pressure Test Casting Grade 65-45-15.
69) SA-403/SA-403M Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fit-
tings:

This specification covers wrought stainless steel fittings for pressure piping applications. Several
grades of austenitic stainless steel alloys are included, designated with a prefix, WP or CR, based
on ASME or MSS dimensional and rating standards, respectively. For each of the WP stainless
grades, several classes of fittings are covered, to indicate whether seamless or welded construction
was utilized. The materials and tests covered by SA-403 are:
A 351/A 351M - Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts;

A 370 - Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
A 743 /A 743M -Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for
General Application;
A 744 /A 744M - Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for Severe Service;
A 960/A 960M - Specification for Common Requirements for Wrought Steel Piping Fittings;
ASME/ANSI B16.9 - Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt-Welding Fittings;
ASME/ANSI B16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded;
MSS SP-25 Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges, and Unions;
MSS SP-43 Standard Practice for Light Weight Stainless Steel Butt-Welding Fittings;
MSS SP-79 - Socket-Welding Reducer Inserts;
MSS SP-83 - Steel Pipe Unions, Socket-Welding and Threaded;
MSS SP-95 - Swage(d) Nipples and Bull Plugs;
ASME Section VIII Division I - Pressure Vessels
ASME Section IX - Welding Qualifications
AWS A 5.4 - Specification for Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Steel Covered Welding
Electrodes;
AWS A 5.9 - Specification for Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Steel Welding Rods and
Bare Electrodes;
ASNT-SNT-TC-1A - Practice for Nondestructive Testing Personnel Qualification and Certification.
Note: Austenitic stainless steel castings are covered in Specifications A 351 /A 351M, A 743 /A
743M, and A 744/A 744M.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The material for fittings shall consist of forgings, bars, plates, or
seamless or welded tubular products. The steel shall be melted by one of the following processes:
Electric furnace (with separate degassing and refining optional), vacuum furnace, or followed by
vacuum or electroslag-consumable remelting. Forging or shaping operations may be performed by
hammering, pressing, piercing, extruding, upsetting, rolling, bending, fusion welding, machining, or a
combination of two or more of these operations.
Grade WP fittings ordered as Class S shall be of seamless construction, and Grade WP fittings or-
dered as Class W must be according to ASME/ANSI B16.9. Grade WP fittings ordered as Class WX
and Class WU must be according to ASME/ANSI B16.9 and all welds made by the fitting manufac-
turer, radiographically examined, in accordance with Paragraph UW -51 of Section VIII, Division I.
Grade CR fittings can be according to requirements of MSS SP-43 and do not require nondestruc-
tive examination.

b) Chemical Analysis: The chemical composition is determined conform to the chemical composi-
tion for the respective grades of materials listed in Table 2, in this Section, in accordance with speci-
fication A 960/A 960M.
c) Heat Treatment: For H grades, including Grade S33228, separate solution heat treatments are
required for solution annealing. The heat treat procedure, consist of solution annealing the fittings at
a minimum temperature of 1900F [1040C] until the chromium carbides go into solution, and then
cooling at a sufficient rate to prevent re-precipitation. Welding must be done prior to heat treatment.
Note: A solution annealing temperature above 1950F [1065C] may impair the resistance to
intergranular corrosion after subsequent exposure in 321, 321H, 347, and 347H.
d) Inspection and Tests: The tensile properties of the fitting material must conform to the require-
ments of Table 4 of this Section, in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370.
e) Repair by Welding: Is permissible for fittings made to the dimensional standards or for other
standard fittings made for stock by the manufacturer. Welding of unacceptable imperfections cannot
be permitted when the depth of defect exceeds 33 1/3% of the nominal wall thickness, or exceeds
10% of the surface area. No cracks are permitted in the weld or surrounding 12 in. [12.7 mm] of
base metal. After weld repair, material shall be heat treated, as required.
f) Hydrostatic Test: All Grade WP fittings must be capable of withstanding without failure, or leak-
age, a test pressure for the specified matching pipe or equivalent material. All Grade CR fittings, ex-
cept tees, must be capable of withstanding without failure or leakage, a test pressure based on the
ratings in MSS SP-43. Grade CR tees fabricated using intersection welds must be capable of pass-
ing a hydrostatic test, based on 70% of the ratings in MSS SP-43.
g) Dimensions: All fittings covered by ASME/ANSI B16.9, ASME/ANSI B16.11, MSS SP-43, MSS
SP-79, MSS SP-83, or MSS SP-95, sizes, shapes, and dimensions are specified in those standards.
h) Product Marking: All fittings must be suitably marked in accordance with MSS SP-25. Marking -
with paint or inks cannot contain harmful amounts of chlorides, metals, or metallic salt, such as zinc
or copper that cause corrosive attack on heating. Vibrating pencil marking is acceptable.
i) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this section indicates the required variations permitted. Table 1, Fit-
ting Classes for WP Grades; Table 2, Chemical requirements; Table 3, Common names; Table 4,
Tensile requirements; Table 5, Product marking examples. Supplementary specifications: S1. Spe-
cial Filler Metal; S2. Stabilization Treatment.
70) SA-409/SA-409M Specification for Welded Large Diameter Austenitic Steel Pipe for
Corrosive or High-Temperature Service:
This specification covers straight seam or spiral seam electric-fusion-welded, light-wall, austenitic
chromium-nickel alloy steel pipe for corrosive or high-temperature service. The sizes covered are
NPS 14 to 30 with extra light (Schedule 5S) and light (Schedule 10S) wall thicknesses. Pipe having
other dimensions may be furnished since it complies with all requirements of this specification.

A 240 - Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and
Strip for Pressure Vessels;
A 262 - Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular Attack in Austenitic Stainless Steels
A 530/A 530M - Specification for General Requirements for Specialized Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe
AWS A 5.22 - Flux Cored Arc Welding;
AWS A 5.30 - Consumable Weld Inserts for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding;
AWS A 5.4 - Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Steel Covered Welding Electrodes;
AWS A 5.9 - Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Steel Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes;
AWS A 5.11 - Nickel and Nickel-Alloy Covered Welding Electrodes;
AWS A 5.14 - Nickel and Nickel-Alloy Bare Welding Rods and Electrodes.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The pipe steel may be either hot-finished or cold-finished, with a
suitable finishing treatment. Welds can be made by the manual or automatic electric-welding pro-
cess. The grain size for all H grades and S30815 are No. 7 or coarser, according to ASTM E 112
Test Methods. This specification covers various types of austenitic materials such as, TP 304, TP
304L, TP 309Cb, TP 317, TP 321, etc.
b) Chemical Analysis: Each type of stainless steel or alloy must conform to chemical composition
prescribed in Table 1 of this Section, and in accordance with specification A 530/A 530M. The pur-
chaser may choose a higher-alloy filler metal when needed for corrosion resistance.
c) Heat Treatment: Consists of heating the material to a minimum temperature of 1900F [1040C],
except for S31254 and S30815, heat treated to 2100F [1150C] and 1920F [1050C] respectively,
and for S34565 heat treated in the range 2050F [1120C] to 2140F [1170C]. All materials are fol-
lowed by quenching in water or other type of cooling. All H steel grades and S30815 are required for
solution annealing.
Note: Solution annealing temperature above 1950F [1065C] may impair the resistance to intergra-
nular corrosion after subsequent exposure to sensitizing conditions in TP321, TP347, and TP348.
d) Inspection and Tests: One transverse tension test and one test (two specimens) of welded pi-
pes must be made on each lot of 200 ft (60 m), finished pipes. Outside diameters NPS 22 or less,
can be furnished in random lengths of 9 to 12 ft. For outside diameters of over NPS 22, the mini-
mum length can be 5 ft.
The bend test is acceptable, if no cracks or other defects exceeding 1/8 in. [3 mm] in any direction,
between the weld and pipe metal after bending. Cracks which originate along the edges of the spec-
imen during testing, less than 14 in. [6.5 mm] measured in any direction may not be considered.
e) Repair by Welding: Minor defects that appear in minimum wall thickness may be repaired by
welding, after approval of the purchaser. When repair depth is greater than 1/4 of the thickness,
must be pressure tested. All welding repairs must be examined by suitable non-destructive exami-
nation techniques.

f) Hydrostatic Tests: The pipe may be air or gas pressure tested with an internal pressure of 100
psi [700 kPa]. The weld and weld area can be inspected with the use of soap solution or any oth er
prepared solution which will detect the leakage of air or gas from the inside.
Chemical requirements; Table 2, Filler metal specifications; Table 3, Tensile requirements. Supple-
mentary requirements: S1. Product Analysis, S2. Radiographic Examination, S3. Corrosion Re-
quirements, S4. Ferrite Control of Weld Deposits, S5. Stabilizing Heat Treatment, S6. Intergranular
Corrosion Test.
71) SA-414/SA-414M Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, for Pressure Vessels:
This specification covers hot-rolled carbon steel sheets for pressure vessels involving fusion welding
or brazing. Welding and brazing techniques are of fundamental importance in accordance with
commercial practices. Hot-rolled carbon steel sheets are generally furnished in cut lengths and to
decimal thickness only. Coils may be furnished, since the tension test specimens are taken to rep-
resent the middle of the slab. The various grades are show below:

% ksi-MPa
Grade A 0.050.21 45 [310]
Grade B 0.050.17 50 [345]
Grade C 0.050.17 55 [380]
Grade D 0.050.15 60 [415]
Grade E 0.10 max 65 [450]
Grade F 0.050.15 70 [485]
Grade G 0.10 max 75 [515]
A 568/A 568M - Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled
and Cold-Rolled;
A 635/A 635M - Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-Thickness Coils, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Struc-
tural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.
Note: Materials are furnished to the following sizes: Width over 12 inches, (300 mm); thickness
0.270 to 0.230 [7.0 to 6.0] (coils only); under 0.230 to 0.057 [6.0 to 1.5] (sheets).
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel is made hot-rolled carbon steel by sheets or coils pickled
(or blast cleaned), and oiled if required, with standard dimensions including types of edges.
b) Chemical Analysis: Each type of steel must conform to chemical composition prescribed in Ta-
ble 1 of this Section, supplied to meet the appropriate standard shown in specification A 568/A
568M or specification A 635/A 635M. For all grades, killed steel is necessary for deoxidation.
Note: A typical ordering description is: ASTM A 414, Grade A, Hot-Rolled Sheet, 0.100 in. [2.54
mm] by 36 in. [914.4 mm] by 96 in. [2438 mm], cut edges.
d) Inspection and Tests: Two tensile tests can be made from each slab as rolled. Yield strength -

is determined by either the 0.2% offset method or by the 0.5% extension under load method.
e) Product Marking: The name or brand of the manufacturer, heat and slab number, specification
designation number, and grade must be legibly marked on each cut length sheet in two places not
less than 12 in. [300 mm] from the edges.
Chemical requirements; Table 2, Limits on unspecified elements; Table 3, Tensile requirements.
72) SA-420/SA-420M Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy
Steel for Low-Temperature Service:
This specification covers wrought carbon steel and alloy steel fittings of seamless and welded con-
struction, covered by the latest revision of ASME B16.9, ASME B16.11, MSS-SP-79, and MSS SP-
95. These fittings are for use in pressure piping and pressure vessel service at low temperatures.
A 960 - Specification for Common Requirements for Wrought Steel Piping Fittings;
ASME/ANSI B 16.9 - Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt-Welding Fittings;
ASME/ANSI B 16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding Threaded Section VIII Division 1, Pres. Vessels;
MSS SP-25 - Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges, and Unions;
MSS SP-79 - Socket Welding Reducer Inserts;
MSS SP-95 - Swaged Nipples and Bull Plugs;
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel is made by one of the following processes: open-hearth,
basic-oxygen, or electric-furnace, and can also be made using recognized steel melting practices
that meet the impact requirements of this specification. The materials for fittings consist of forgings,
bars, plates, seamless or fusion welded tubular products with filler metal added. The grades are:

% ksi-MPa
WPL6 0.30 6085 [415] [585]
WPL9 0.20 6388 [435] [610]
WPL3 0.20 6590 [450] [620]
WPL8 0.13 100125 [690] [865]
Forging or forming operations can be performed by hammering, pressing, piercing, extruding, upset-
ting, working, bending, fusion-welding, or machining, or by a combination of two or more of these
operations. Welds in tubular products from which fittings are made, must be made by welding opera-
tors and welding procedures qualified under ASME Section IX. The welded joints of fittings are fin-
ished in accordance with the requirements of Paragraph UW -35(a) of ASME Section VIII, Division 1.
Butt-weld tees manufactured by cold-forming methods must be liquid penetrant or magnetic particle
examined by one of the methods specified in supplementary requirement S52 or S53 of specifica-
tion A 960. The radiography of welds can be done either prior to or after forming.

b) Chemical Analysis: The steel must conform to chemical composition for the respective material
prescribed in Table 1, conform to the requirements of Specification A 960.
c) Heat Treatment: All fittings are furnished in the normalized, normalized and tempered, annealed,
or quenched and tempered condition. All welding shall be completed prior to the austenitizing heat
treatment. After forming, the fittings shall be allowed to cool below the lower critical before applying
one of the heat treatments.
d) Inspection and Tests: One tension test can be made on each heat, since that the wall thickness
of the fittings and the representative sample thicknesses do not vary more than 1/4 in. [6 mm]. At
least one tension test per heat of weld metal can be made after heat treatment in the same manner
as the base metal.
The notched bar impact properties of the base metal and weld metal shall conform to the requir e-
ments of Table 4 or Table 5 of this Section. The notched-bar impact test must be made in accord-
ance with the procedure for the simple-beam, Charpy-type test of Test Methods and Definitions A
370.When an erratic result is caused by a defective specimen, or there is uncertainty in test proce-
dure, a retest must be done.
Welded butt joints must be radiographically examined or ultrasonically examined throughout the en-
tire length in accordance with Paragraph UW-51 of ASME Section VIII, Division 1, or in accordance
with Appendix 12 of ASME Section VIII, Division 1, respectively.
Note: When testing welds, the notch of the specimen must be in the welded joint and, the longitudi-
nal axis of the specimen must be transverse to the longitudinal axis of the weld.
e) Hydrostatic Tests: Hydrostatic testing of fittings is not required by this specification. However, all
fittings must be capable of withstanding without failure or leakage, a hydrostatic test pressure equal
to that prescribed for the specified matching pipe with equivalent material.
f) Dimensions: Butt-welding fittings and butt-welding short radius elbows and returns must conform
to the dimensions and tolerances given in ASME/ANSI B16.9. Socket-welding and threaded fittings
must conform to the sizes, shapes, dimensions, and tolerances specified in the latest revision of
ASME B16.11.
g) Repair by Welding: Is permissible for parts made to dimensional standards, such as those of
ASME or equivalent standards. Welding must be accomplished with a weld procedure, to produce
low hydrogen in the weldment. Short circuit gas metal arc welding is permissible only with the ap-
proval of the purchaser. After weld repair, material must be heat treated, and identified with the
welders stamp or symbol in accordance with ASME Section IX.
h) Product Marking: All fittings must have the prescribed information marked on each fitting in ac-
cordance with MSS SP-25, painted or stenciled on the fitting or stamped on a metal or plastic tag.
i) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this section indicates the required variations permitted. Table 1,
Chemical requirements; Table 2, Post-weld heat treatment; Table 3, Tensile requirements; Table 4,

Charpy Impact for WPL6, WPL9, AND WPL3; Table 5, Charpy Impact for WPL8; Table 6, Impact
Test Temperature.
73) SA-423/SA-423M Specification for Seamless and Electric-Welded Low-Alloy Steel

Tubes:
This specification covers minimum-wall-thickness, seamless and electric-resistance welded, low-

alloy steel tubes for pressure containing parts such as economizers or other applications where cor-
rosion resistance is important. The materials and tests covered by SA-423 are:

A 450/A 450M Specif. for General Requirements for Carbon, Ferritic Alloy, and Austenitic Alloy Steel Tubes.
a) Materials and Manufacture: Tubes made by the seamless process may be hot finished or cold
finished. The tubing sizes and thicknesses usually furnished to this specification are 1/2 to 5 in.
[12.7 to 127 mm] in outside diameter and 0.035 to 0.500 in. [0.9 to 12.7 mm] inclusive, in minimum
wall thicknesses. The grades are:

% ksi-MPa
Grade 1 0.15 6075 [415] [515]
Grade 2 0.15 6075 [415] [515]]
prescribed in Table 1 conform to the requirements of Specification A 450/A 450M.
c) Heat Treatment: All tubes must be normalized or the heat treatment can be as necessary, ac-
cording to the requirements of this specification.
d) Inspection and Tests: One tension test must be made on a specimen for lots of not more than
50 tubes. The flattening test, the flaring test (seamless tubes) and the flange test (welded tubes) can
be made on specimens from each end of one finished tube, from each lot. For welded tubes, one
reverse flattening test can be made on a specimen from each 1500 ft [460 m] of finished tubing.
Mechanical property requirements do not apply to tubing smaller than 1/4 in. [3.2 mm] in inside di-
ameter or 0.015 in. [0.4 mm] in thickness. The Brinell or Rockwell hardness tests are made on spec-
imens from two tubes from each lot. The tubes must show a hardness number not exceeding 170
HB or 87 HRB. Tubes when inserted in the boiler must stand expanding and beading without show-
ing cracks or flaws.
e) Hydrostatic Tests: Each tube must be subjected to the hydrostatic test or a nondestructive elec-
tric test may be used when specified by the purchaser.
Chemical requirements; Table 2, Lot of tubes heat-treated by continuous process; Table 3, Tensile

requirements. Supplementary requirement, S1. Surface Condition; S2. Additional Testing of Welded
Tubing per ASME Request.
74) SA-426/SA-426M Specification for Centrifugally Cast Ferritic Alloy Steel Pipe for
This specification covers centrifugally cast alloy steel pipe intended for use in high-temperature and
high-pressure services. Several grades of ferritic steels are covered, such as Grades CP1, CP11,
CP22, CP5, CP9, CP91, etc. The materials and tests covered by SA-426 are:
A 609/A 609M - Practice for Castings, Carbon, Low-Alloy, and Martensitic Stainless Steel, Ultrasonic Exami-
nation;
E 94 - Guide for Radiographic Examination;
E 186 - Reference Radiographs for Heavy-Walled (2 to 4 1/2 in. [51 to 114 mm]) Steel Castings;
E 208 - Test Method for Conducting Drop-Weight Test to Determine Nil-Ductility Transition Temperature of
Ferritic Steels;
E 280 - Reference Radiographs for Heavy-Walled (4 1/2 to 12 in. [114 to 305 mm]) Steel Castings;
E 446 - Reference Radiographs for Steel Castings Up to 2 in. [51 mm] in. Thickness;
a) Materials and Manufacture: Pipe castings made under this specification are ferritic Si-Cr-Mo al-
loy steels, cast by centrifugally processes, conform to the applicable requirements of Specification A
999/A 999M. After cast, all pipes can be machined on the inner and outer surfaces to a roughness
value no greater than 250 in. [6.35 mm] arithmetical average deviation (AA), or according to specifi-
cation as in ASME/ANSI B46.1.
b) Chemical Analysis: An analysis of each heat can be made by the manufacturer to determine the
percentages of elements specified in Table 1 of this Section, on a test sample taken preferable du r-
ing the pouring of the heat.
c) Heat Treatment: Heat treatment must be performed after cooling and below the transformation
range. All pipes must be furnished in the normalized and tempered or liquidquenched and tem-
pered condition. The temperature for tempering cannot be less than 1250F [675C], except for
Grades CP1, CP2, CP11, CP12, and CP15 for which the temperature for tempering cannot be less
than 1100F [595C]. Grade CP91 shall be normalized at 1900-1975F (1040-1080) and tempered
at 1350-1470F (730-800C).
d) Inspection and Tests: Test coupons specimens are cast attached to separate blocks from the
same heat as the casting represented, and heat-treated in the same manner. Tension test speci-
mens must be machined to the standard round 2 in. [50 mm] gage length specimens, according to
Test Methods and Definitions A 370. Tensile and hardness requirements must be in accordance
with in Table 2 in this Section.

e) Hydrostatic Tests: Each tube must be subjected to the hydrostatic test or performed later by the
purchaser. When pipes are furnished without hydrostatic tests, must include the mandatory marking
letters NH, showing also in materials specification.
f) Manufacturing Tables: Next, the required variations permitted. Table 1, Chemical requirements;
Table 2, Tensile properties and hardness requirements. Supplementary requirements: S1. Addition-
al Tension Tests; S2. Flattening Test, S3. Photomicrographs; S4. Photomicrographs for Individual
Pieces; S5. Metal Structure and Etching Tests; S6. Radiographic Examination; S7. Liquid Penetrant
Examination; S8. Magnetic Particle Inspection; S9. Ultrasonic Inspection; S10. Residual Elements;
S11. Charpy Impact Test; S12. Drop Weight Test; Table S1, Residual Elements.
75) SA-435/SA-435M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Steel

Plates:
This specification covers the procedure and acceptance standards for straight-beam, pulse-echo,
ultrasonic examination of rolled fully killed carbon and alloy steel plates, 1/2 in. [12.5 mm] and over
in thickness. Personnel performing examinations must be qualified and certified in accordance with
the requirements of the ASNT SNT-TC-1A or an equivalent accepted standard.
Apparatus: The manufacturer must furnish suitable ultrasonic pulse-echo straight beam type
equipment, and qualified personnel necessary for performing the test. The transducer is normally 1
to 1 1/8 in. [25 to 30 mm] in diameter or 1 in. [25 mm] square; however, any transducer having a
minimum active area of 0.7 in. [450mm] may be used. The tests may be performed by one of the
following methods: direct contact, immersion, or liquid column coupling.
Test Conditions: Clean and smooth the plate surface sufficiently to maintain a reference back re-
flection from the opposite side of the plate at least 50% of the full scale during scanning. Ac-
ceptance of defects in close proximity may require inspection from the second major surface. Plates
ordered in the quenched and tempered condition must be tested following heat treatment.
A nominal test frequency of 2 1/4 MHz is recommended. Thickness, grain size, or microstructure of
the material and nature of the equipment may require a higher or lower test frequency. A clear, easi-
ly interpreted trace pattern should be produced during the examination. Frequencies less than 1
MHz may be used only on agreement with the purchaser.
Procedure: A suitable couplant such as water, soluble oil, or glycerin, can be used. Conduct the
examination with a test frequency and adjustment to produce a minimum 50 to a maximum 75% of
full scale reference back reflection from the opposite side of a sound area of the plate. While cali-
brating the instrument, sweep the crystal along the plate surface for a distance of at least 1T or 6 in.
[150 mm], and note the position of the back reflection. A shift in location of the back reflection during
calibration may be cause for recalibration of the instrument.
The scanning must be continuous along perpendicular grid lines on nominal 9 in. [225 mm] centers,
or continuous along parallel paths, transverse to the major plate axis, on nominal 4 in. [100 mm]
centers, or be continuous along parallel paths to the major plate axis, on 3 in. [75 mm] or smaller
centers. An additional path may be scanned within 2 in. [50 mm] of all edges of the plate on the

scanning surface. When grid scanning is performed and complete loss of back reflection accompa-
nied by continuous indications is detected along a given grid line, the entire surface area of the
squares adjacent to this indication must be scanned continuously.
The entire surface area of a 9 by 9 in. [225 by 225 mm] square centered on this indication must be
scanned continuously. Move the transducer away from the center of the discontinuity until the
heights of the back reflection and discontinuity indications are equal. Mark the plate at a point
equivalent to the center of the transducer. Repeat the operation to establish the boundary.
Acceptance Standards: Any discontinuity indication causing a total loss of back reflection which
cannot be contained within a circle, the diameter of which is 3 in. [75 mm] or one half of the plate
thickness, whichever is greater, is unacceptable. Plates accepted in accordance with this specifica-
tion must be identified by stamping or stenciling UT 435 adjacent to the markings required by the
material specification. The purchasers representative must witness the tests.
76) SA-437/SA-437M Specification for Alloy Steel Turbine-Type Bolting Material Special-
ly Heat-Treated for High-Temperature Service:
This specification covers alloy-steel bolting material specially heat treated for high-temperature ser-
vice, such as steam turbine, gas turbine, and similar uses. The term bolting materials, used in this
specification, cover rolled or forged bars, bolts, nuts, screws, washers, studs, and stud bolts. Mate-
rials and tests are according to:
Intended for Use at Any Temperature from Cryogenic to the Creep Range.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel bars must be hot wrought, and may be further processed
by centerless grinding or by cold drawing. Three levels of bolting strength are covered, designated
Grades B4B, B4C, and B4D, as shown below:

% psi-MPa
B4B 0.20-0.25 145 000 [1000]
B4C 0.20-0.25 115 000 [790]
B4D 0.36-0.44 125 000 [860]
prescribed in Table 2 conform to the requirements of Specification A 962/A 962M. Although the
high-temperature properties are not specified, must be implied by control of the chemistry, heat
treatment, and room-temperature properties of the materials.
c) Heat Treatment: Grades B4B and B4C must be heated to a temperature range of 1875 to
1925F [1025 to 1050C] and liquid quenched to below 600F [316C], and then be uniformly re-
heated for tempering at a temperature not less than 1150F [620C], cooled to room temperature.
Material Grade B4D must be heated to a temperature range of 1700 to 1750F [925 to 954C], oil
quenched, and then be uniformly reheated at a temperature of 1200F [650C] minimum, cooled to
room temperature.

The stress relieving treatment is required after any stretcher, roller, or rotary-straightening or cold-
finishing operations performed after heat treatment, or local gagging or press straightening to cor-
rect camber limitations in excess of 1/4 in. in any 5 ft [6 mm in any 1.5 m]. The minimum stress re-
lieving temperature must be 100F [55C] below the minimum tempering temperature for Grades
B4B, B4C and Grade B4D. Tempering temperature for a minimum of 2 h and double tempering may
be used to enhance properties.
d) Inspection and Tests: Tensile requirements must conform to properties prescribed in Table 1 in
this Section, at room temperature after heat treatment. NDT methods can be Eddy Current (EC),
Magnetic Particle (MPI) (wet or dry), Liquid Penetrant (LPI), Ultrasonic (UT), or Visual Testing (VT),
at the option of the manufacturer. For LPI or MPI, linear indications (longer than 1/16 in. [1.5 mm]
with a length greater than three times their width) are unacceptable.
For UT or ET, reject levels for linear indications are based on the alarm response from a surface
notch with a maximum depth of 0.012 in. [0.30 mm] in a calibration bar. Product being subjected to
VT must be pickled prior to inspection. VT indications longer than 1/8 in. are not permitted. Impact
properties are prescribed in Table 3 in this Section, at room temperature after heat treatment.
Note: Threads must be formed after heat treatment. All nuts are also subject to the impact and ten-
sion requirements of this specification.
f) Manufacturing Tables: Next, the required variations permitted. Table 1, Tensile requirements;
Table 2, Chemical requirements; Table 3, Impact requirements; Table 4, Hardness requirements for
bolts; Table 5, Hardness requirements for nuts and washers; Table 6, Permissible variations in size
of hot-rolled bars. Supplementary requirements: S1. Non-Destructive Examination.
77) SA-449 Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat-Treated,
120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use:
This specification covers quenched and tempered steel hex cap screws, bolts, and studs having a
minimum tensile strength of 120 ksi for diameters 1.0 in. and smaller; 105 ksi for diameters over 1.0
in. to 1 1/2 in.; and 90 ksi for diameters 1 3/4 in. to 3.0 in. inclusive. The term fasteners in this
specification denotes hex cap screws, bolts, and studs. The fasteners are intended for general en-
gineering use. The materials and tests covered by SA-449 are:


G 101 - Guide for Estimating the Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance of Low-Alloy Steels;
ASME/ANSI - B1.1 Unified Screw Threads;
ASME/ANSI - B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws;
ASME/ANSI - B18.24 Part Identifying Number (PIN) Code System Standard for B18 Fastener Products.
a) Materials and Manufacture: The steel is made by the open-hearth, electric furnace, or basic-
oxygen process, in accordance with specification F 788/F 788M. Type 1 fasteners are plain carbon
steel, carbon boron steel, alloy steel, or alloy boron steel; Type 2 fasteners were withdrawn (in
2003); Type 3 fasteners are weathering steels, in accordance with the table below:
Grade Carbon, Tensile Strength, Hardness Testing

% psi HB (min. max.)
Type 1 0.30 to 0.52 90 000 120 000 223 - 319
Type 3 0.33 to 0.40 90 000 120 000 223 - 319
b) Chemical Analysis: Type 1 fasteners must be plain carbon steel, carbon boron steel, alloy steel,
or alloy boron steels, at the manufacturers option, conforming to the requirements in Table 1 in this
Section. Type 3 fasteners are weathering steel conform to chemical compositions specified in Table
2 in this Section. Chemical composition, A, B, C, D, E o F, are options of the manufacturer. Chemi-
cal analyses are performed in accordance with Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751.
c) Heat Treatment: Type 1 fasteners produced from medium carbon steel, to which chromium,
nickel, molybdenum, or boron were intentionally added, must be quenched in a liquid medium from
the austenitizing temperature. Type 3 fasteners, must be quenched in oil from the austenitizing tem-
perature. Type 1 and Type 3 must be tempered by reheating to not less than 800F (427C).
d) Inspection and Tests: Fasteners must be tested full size according to the tensile strength, the
proof load and the yield strength requirements in accordance with Table 4 and 5 of this Section.
When equipment for full-size testing is not available, or when testing is impractical with full-length of
the fastener, machined specimens can be tested conform to the requirements according to Table 4
and 5 of this Section. Nuts must be according to specification A 563. Each grade of nuts must be:
Grade of Fastener and Surface Finish Nut Grade and Style
1/4 to 1 1/2 in., plain (or with coating of insuffi- B, hex

cient thickness to require over-tapped nuts):
Over 1 1/2 to 3 in., plain (or with coating of A, heavy hex

insufficient thickness to require over-tapped nuts):
1/4 to 3 in., zinc-coated (or with a coating DH, heavy hex

thickness requiring over-tapped nuts):
1/4 to 3 in., Type 3: C3, DH3, heavy hex
Bolts sizes 1.00 in. and smaller having a length of 2 1/4 D and longer, and sizes larger than 1.00 in.
having a length of 3D and longer, must be wedge tested full size. Sizes 1.00 in. and smaller having

a length shorter than 2 1/4 D and down to 2D that cannot be wedge tensile tested, must be axially
tension tested. The rotational capacity test is intended to evaluate the efficiency of the lubricant.
The bolt and nut test can be considered as non-conforming if the assembly fails to pass any one of
the following specified requirements: inability to install the assembly to the nut rotation, inability to
remove the nut after installing, shear failure of the threads determined by visual examination. In
case of dispute, a calibrated thread ring gage (Class X tolerance, gage tolerance plus) must be
used to verify compliance.
Test methods must be conducted in accordance with Test Methods F 606. The proof load (rather
than yield strength) is preferred for fasteners 1 1/4 in. and under in diameter. Hexagon bolts are
tested by the wedge tension method, and must show no fracture in the body or threads, or at the
junction of the head and body. Studs and stud-bolts must be tested by the axial tension method.
Note: Evaluation of the surface discontinuities, quench cracks, forging cracks, head bursts, shear
bursts, seams, folds, thread laps, voids, tool marks, nicks, and gouges shall be in accordance with
Specification F 788/F 788M. Tensile, proof load and hardness tests conducted in accordance with
Test Methods F 606 must not show signs of failure if subjected to the nut rotation.
When hot-dip is specified, and when no preference is specified, the fasteners must be zinc-coated
by the hot-dip process conform to the requirements of specification F 2329. When zinc-coated nuts
are ordered with the bolts, the nuts must be lubricated in accordance with specification A 563, to
minimize galling. When mechanically deposited is specified, the fasteners must be conform to re-
quirements of Class 55 of Specification B 695.
e) Dimensions: The bolts must conform to the dimensions for heavy hex structural bolts specified in
ASME B18.2.6. Threads are the Unified Coarse Thread Series as specified in ASME B1.1, e Class
2A tolerances. After zinc coating, the maximum limits of pitch and major diameter must not exceed
the Class 2A limit by more than the following amounts:
Nominal Bolt Diameter (in.) Hot Dip Zinc Mechanical Zinc
1/4 0.016 0.012

5/16, 3/8 0.017 0.012
7/16, 1/2 0.018 0.012
9/16, 5/8, 3/4 0.020 0.013
7/8 0.022 0.015
1 to 1 1/4 0.024 0.016
1 3/8, 1 1/2 0.027 0.018
13/4 to 3.0 0.050 0.033
The minimum number of tests from each lot for the tests specified below must be as follows:
Tests Number of Tests in accordance with Guide F 1470:
Hardness, tensile strength, proof Referenced coating specification: Specification

load and rotational capacity; F 788/F 788M.
Coating weight/thickness;

Surface discontinuities;
Dimensions and thread fit; ASME B18.2.6.
Must conform to the latest issue of ASME B18.2.1. Uncoated threads are according to ASME/ANSI
B1.1, Unified National Coarse Thread Series, with Class 2A tolerances. Zinc coated bolts, to be
used with zinc-coated nuts or tapped holes, in accordance with Specification A 563, must have UNC
Class 2A threads before hot-dip or mechanically deposited zinc-coating.
The supplier may furnish either a hot-dip zinc coating in accordance with specification F 2329, or a
mechanically deposited zinc coating in accordance with specification B 695, Class 55. Threaded
components (bolts and nuts) are also coated by the same zinc-coating process.
Note: According to tests, hydrogen-stress cracking or stress cracking corrosion may occur on hot-
dip galvanized bolts. Fasteners electroplated or mechanically coated to 0.0005 in. or less, threads
prior to plating must conform to ASME B1.1 Class 2A and after plating cannot exceed the Class 3A
maximum limits, that is, Class 2A plus the allowance.
f) Marking & Packaging: Type 1 hex cap screws and bolts and Type 3 studs 3/8 in. and larger, and
studs smaller than 3/8 in. are marked A 449, underline. All Type 3 hex cap screws, bolts, and
studs are marked as weathering steel. Heads of type 3 hex cap screws and bolts are marked A
449 underlined. Fasteners not marked are considered nonconforming and subject to rejection.
Packaging must be in accordance with Practice D 3951.
Chemical requirements for Type 1; Table 2, Chemical requirements for Type 3; Table 3, Hardness
requirements; Table 4, Tensile load requirements for fine-thread; Tensile strength requirements.
Supplementary requirements: S1. Markings.
78) SA-450/SA-450M Specification for General Requirements for Carbon, Ferritic Alloy,
and Austenitic Alloy Steel Tubes:
This specification covers a group of requirements which are mandatory requirements to the follow-
ing ASTM tubular product specifications shown below:
Seamless Low-Carbon and Carbon-Molybdenum Steel Still Tubes for Refinery Service - A 161;
Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel and Carbon-Manganese Steel Boiler Tubes - A 178/A 178M;
Seamless Cold-Drawn Low-Carbon Steel Heat-Exchanger and Condenser Tubes - A 179/A 179M;;
Seamless Carbon Steel Boiler Tubes for High-Pressure Service - A 192/A 192M;
Seamless Cold-Drawn Intermediate Alloy- Steel Heat-Exchanger and Condenser Tubes - A 199/A 199M;
Seamless Intermediate Alloy-Steel Still Tubes for Refinery Service - A 200;
Seamless Carbon-Molybdenum Alloy-Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes - A 209/A 209M;
Seamless Medium-Carbon Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes - A 210/A 210M;
Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic Alloy- Steel Boiler, Superheater, and Heat-Exchanger Tubes - A 213/A 213M
Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel Heat-Exchanger and Condenser Tubes - A 214/A 214M;
Electric-Resist. Welded Carbon Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes for High-Pressure Service-A 226/A 226M;
Welded Austenitic Steel Boiler, Super- heater, Heat-Exchanger, and Condenser Tubes - A 249/A 249M;
Electric-Resistance-Welded Ferritic Alloy- Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes - A 250/A 250M;
Seamless and Welded Ferritic and Martensitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service - A 268/A 268M;

Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service - A 269;
Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Sanitary Tubing - A 270;
Seamless Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Steel Still Tubes for Refinery Service - A 271;
Seamless and Welded Carbon and Alloy- Steel Tubes for Low-Temperature Service - A 334/A 334M;
Seamless and Electric-Welded Low-Alloy Steel Tubes - A 423/A 423M;
Electric-Resistance-Welded Coiled Steel Tubing for Gas and Fuel Oil Lines - A 539;
Seamless Cold-Drawn Carbon Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes - A 556/A 556M;
Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes - A 557/A 557M;
Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes - A 688/A 688M;
Seamless Medium-Strength Carbon-Molybdenum Alloy-Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes - A 692;
Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for Breeder Reactor Core Components - A 771;
Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service - A 789/A 789M;
Welded Unannealed Ferritic Stainless Steel Tubing - A 791/A 791M;
Welded Ferritic Stainless Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes - A 803/A 803M;
Seamless, Cold-Drawn Carbon Steel Tubing for Hydraulic System Service - A 822;
Austenitic and Ferritic Stainless Steel Duct Tubes for Breeder Reactor Core Components - A 826;
High-Frequency Induction-Welded, Unannealed Austenitic Steel Condenser Tubes - A 851.
E 92 - Test Method for Vickers Hardness of Metallic Materials;
E 426 - Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Testing of Seamless and Welded Tubular Products, Aus-
tenitic Stainless Steel and Similar Alloys;
E 570 - Practice for Flux Leakage Examination of Ferromagnetic Steel Tubular Products.
a) Process: The steel may be made by any process and cast in ingots or strand cast.
b) Chemical Composition: Chemical analysis, and method of analysis, must be in accordance with
Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751. For stainless steels, the grade is defined as an
alloy described and identified by its own UNS designation in a table of chemical requirements.
c) Tensile Properties: The materials must conform to the tensile properties prescribed in the indi-
vidual specification. The yield strength corresponding to a permanent offset of 0.2% of the gage
length or to a total extension of 0.5% of the gage length under load shall be determined.
d) Permissible Variations in Wall Thickness: For tubes outside diameter 2 in. [50.8 mm] and over
and thickness 0.220 in. [5.6 mm] and over, the variation in wall thickness cannot exceed the per-
centage of the actual mean wall at the section. For tubes 2 in. [50.8 mm] - 2% or less of specified
outside less diameter; greater than 2 in. [50.8 mm] - 3% or less of specified outside; all other diame-
ters - 0.020 in. [0.5 mm] or less.
e) Repair by Welding: Must be performed by welders or welding operators qualified in accordance

with ASME Section IX. Repair welding of base metal defects in tubing is permissible only with the

approval of the purchaser and must be marked WR. The composition of the deposited filler metal
must be suitable for the composition being welded.
f) Test Specimens: Are taken from the ends of finished tubes prior to upsetting, swaging, expand-
ing, or other forming operations, or being cut to length, and must be smooth on the ends and free of
burrs and flaws. Mechanical tests required must be made in accordance with Annex A2 of Test
Methods and Definitions A 370.
g) Flattening Test: For seamless tubes with length not less than 2 1/2 in. [63 mm] and for welded
tubes with length not less than 4 in. [100 mm], during the first step, which is a test for ductility, no
cracks or breaks, on the inside, outside, or end surfaces must occur in seamless tubes, and on the
inside or outside surfaces of welded tubes. During the second step, which is a test for soundness,
the flattening must continue until the specimen breaks or the opposite walls of the tube meet each
other. Superficial ruptures resulting from surface imperfections cannot be cause for rejection.
h) Flaring Test: A section of tube approximately 4 in. [100 mm] in length must stand being flared,
with a tool having a 60 angle until the tube at the mouth of the flare has been expanded to the per-
centages specified in Table 5 in this Section, without cracking or showing imperfections.
.
i) Flange Test: A section of tube must be capable of having a flange turned over at a right angle to
the body of the tube without cracking or showing imperfections. The width of the flange for carbon
and alloy steels must be not less than the percentages specified in Table 6 in this Section. For the
austenitic grades, the width of the flange for all sizes cannot be less than 15%.
j) Hardness Test: When Brinell hardness testing is used, a 10 mm ball with 3000, 1500, or 500 kg
load, or a 5 mm ball with 750 kg load may be used. For tubes, diameter less than 0.200 in. [5.1 mm]
and wall thickness 0.065 in. [1.7 mm, the Rockwell hardness test can be used.
k) Hydrostatic Test: May be performed prior to cutting to final length, or prior to upsetting, swaging,
expanding, bending, or other forming operations, or both. The hydrostatic test pressure determined
by a standard equation can be rounded to the nearest 50 psi [0.5 MPa] for pressure below 1000 psi
[7 MPa], and to the nearest 100 psi [1 MPa] for pressures 1000 psi [7 MPa] and above.
l) Air Underwater Pressure Test: When this test is employed, each tube must be internally pres-
surized to 150 psi [1000 kPa] minimum with clean and dry compressed air while being submerged in
clear water, well-lighted, preferably by underwater illumination. Any evidence of air leakage of the
pneumatic couplings must be corrected prior to testing. Inspection must be made of the entire exter-
nal surface of the tube, after holding the pressure for not less than 5 s. If any tube shows leakage
during the air underwater test, it must be rejected.
m) Nondestructive Electric Test: When nondestructive examination is specified, each tube must
be examined by a nondestructive examination method in accordance with Practice E 213, Practice
E 309 (for ferromagnetic materials), Practice E 426 (for non-magnetic materials), or Practice E 570.
Upon agreement, Practice E 273 can be employed in addition to one of the full periphery tests.

n) NDT Examinations: The Ultrasonic examination is intended to detect longitudinal discontinuities

having a reflective area similar to or larger than the calibration reference notches. This examination
may not detect circumferentially oriented imperfections or short, deep defects. The Eddy Current
examination has the capability of detecting significant discontinuities, especially of the short abrupt
type. The Flux Leakage is capable of detecting the presence and location of significant longitudinally
or transversely oriented discontinuities.
o) Rejection: Each length of tubing received from the manufacturer may be inspected by the pur-
chaser and, if it does not meet the requirements of the specification based on the test method as
outlined in the specification, the material may be rejected.
p) Certified Test Report: When specified in the purchase order or contract, the supplier must fur-
nish a Certified Test Report certifying that the material was manufactured, sampled, tested, and in-
spected in accordance with the Specification, including year date, the Supplementary Requirements,
and any other requirements designated in the purchase order or contract.
q) Markings: Each length of tube must be legibly stenciled with the manufacturers name or brand,
the specification number, and grade, and need not include the year date of the specification. For
tubes with diameters less than 114 in.[31.8 mm] and length under 3 ft [1 m], the required infor-
mation may be marked on a tag securely attached to the bundle or box, in which the tubes are
shipped. Bar coding should be consistent with the Automotive Industry Action Group (AIAG).
r) Packaging and Loading: Must be in accordance with the procedures of Practices A 700.
s) Manufacturing Tables: Next, this section indicates the required variations permitted. Table 1,
Permissible variations in weight per foot; Table 2, Permissible variations in wall thickness; Table 3,
Permissible variations in outside diameter; Table 4, Permissible variations in length; Table 5, Flaring
test requirements; Table 6, Flange requirements; Table 7, Hydrostatic test pressures; Table 8,
Straightness tolerances.

M 569 Content

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

M 569 Content

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PDHonline Course M569 (10 PDH)

ASME Section II/A - Ferrous Materials

5272 Meadow Estates Drive

An Approved Continuing Education Provider

ASME SECTION II/A FERROUS MATERIALS

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 1 of 136

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 2 of 136

I. THE ASME CODE SECTIONS:

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 3 of 136

II. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS:

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 4 of 136

Mechanical Properties: Mean a qualitative or quantitative procedure that consists of determination

ASTM A36 - ASME SA36:

General Chemical Composition of ASTM A36 - ASME SA36

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 5 of 136

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 6 of 136

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 7 of 136

III. ASME SECTION II, PART A FERROUS MATERIALS:

A 36/A - 36M - Carbon Structural Steel;

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 8 of 136

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 9 of 136

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 10 of 136

f) Welding Requirements: Welding must be in accordance with a welding procedure specification

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 11 of 136

j) Supplementary Requirements: The standardized supplementary requirements are used, when

2) SA-20/SA-20M - General Requirements of Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels:

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 12 of 136

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 13 of 136

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 14 of 136

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 15 of 136

j) Supplementary Requirements: The standardized supplementary requirements are used, when

n) Appendices: Indicated as non-mandatory information, the Appendix X1 provides information on

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 16 of 136

3) SA-29/SA-29M Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought:

A 108 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished;

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 17 of 136

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 18 of 136

5) SA-36/SA-36M Specification for Carbon Structural Steel:

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 19 of 136

d) Manufacturing Tables: Is recommended a certification that the material must be manufactured

6) SA-47/SA-47M Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings:

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 20 of 136

e) Certification and Identification Marking: A manufacturers certification or compliance must

f) Manufacturing Tables: Composed of Table 1, Tension Test Requirements; Table 2, Typical

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 21 of 136

7) SA-53/SA-53M Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Type F: Furnace-butt welded, continuous welded Grade A;

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 22 of 136

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 23 of 136

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 24 of 136

8) SA-105/SA-105M Specification of Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications:

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 25 of 136

Flanges above Class 300 according to ASME B16.5;

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 26 of 136

9) SA-106/SA-106M Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 27 of 136

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 28 of 136

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 29 of 136

T = Specified wall thickness, in. (mm);

11) SA-135 Specification for Electric-Resistance Welded Steel Pipe:

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 30 of 136

Under NPS 6: 2 from each lot of 400 pipes or a fraction;

2015 Jurandir Primo Page 31 of 136